Hyundai Accent HCI 2019 Owner's Manual

O pe attiio n

M aiin na e

S pe ciiffiic attiio

S M NU

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.

As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive

(RHD). The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD models are opposite of those written in this manual.

F2

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

F3

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive HYUNDAI. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this HYUNDAI, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2016 HYUNDAI Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI

Motor Company.

F4

Introduction

H OW US E T S M AN L

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents.

Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight chapters plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. This Owner's

Manual provides you with many safety precautions and operating procedures. This information alerts you to potential hazards that may hurt you or others, as well as damage to your vehicle.

Safety messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe these hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce the risks.

Warnings and instructions contained in this manual are for your safety.

Failure to follow safety warnings and instructions can lead to serious injury or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER,

WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will be used.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential physical injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. The safety alert symbol precedes the signal words

DANGER, WARNING and

CAUTION.

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

F5

Introduction

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

FU EL EQ UIIR EM NT

Gasoline engine

Unleaded

Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having an Octane

Rating of RON (Research Octane

Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

87 or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels)

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

CAUTION

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is detrimental to the catalytic converter and will damage the engine control system’s oxygen sensor and affect emission control.

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified (We recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.)

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refueling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

F6

Introduction

Leaded (if equipped)

For some countries, your vehicle is designed to use leaded gasoline.

When you are going to use leaded gasoline, we recommend that you ask an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Octane rating of leaded gasoline is same with unleaded one.

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol.

2. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs drivability.

Other fuels

Using fuel additives such as:

- Silicone fuel additive

- MMT (Magnanese, Mn) fuel additive

- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive

- Other metallic-based fuel additives may result in cylinder misfire, poor acceleration, engine stalling, damage to the catalyst, or abnormal corrosion, and may cause damage to the engine resulting in a reduction in the overall life of the powertrain.

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

F7

Introduction

Use of MTBE

HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl

Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary

Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use unleaded gasoline which has an octane rating of RON (Research

Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock

Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or

Octane Rating of RON (Research

Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).

For customers who do not use good quality gasolines including fuel additives regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, one bottle of additives added to the fuel tank at every 15,000km (for

Europe)/ 5,000km (except Europe).

Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.

Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

F8

Introduction

Diesel engine

Diesel fuel

Diesel engine must be operated only on commercially available diesel fuel that complies with EN 590 or comparable standard. (EN stands for

"European Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel, heating oils, or non-approved fuel additives, as this will increase wear and cause damage to the engine and fuel system.

The use of non-approved fuels and / or fuel additives will result in a limitation of your warranty rights.

Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions.

• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type diesel fuel.

• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel fuel.

Watch the fuel level in the tank very carefully : If the engine stops through fuel failure, the circuits must be completely purged to permit restarting.

CAUTION

Do not let any gasoline or water enter the tank. This would make it necessary to drain it out and to bleed the lines to avoid jamming the injection pump and damaging the engine.

CAUTION

It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for diesel vehicle equipped with the DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur) and unspecified additives, it can cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.

Biodiesel

Commercially supplied Diesel blends of no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in your vehicle if Biodiesel meets

EN 14214 or equivalent specifications.

(EN stands for "European Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7% made from rapeseed methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester (VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding 7% with biodiesel will cause increased wear or damage to the engine and fuel system. Repair or replacement of worn or damaged components due to the use of non approved fuels will not be covered by the manufactures warranty.

CAUTION

• Never use any fuel, whether diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise, that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.

• Never use any fuel additives or treatments that are not recommended or approved by the vehicle manufacturer.

F9

Introduction

V EH E M OD FIIC AT S

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

V EH LE RE K-

P RO ES

By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first

2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.

F10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety system of your vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

Multimedia System

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

I

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2

Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3

Interior overview....................................................1-4

Instrument panel overview ...................................1-6

Engine compartment .............................................1-8


E XT RIIO R O VE VIIE

■

Front view

1-2

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Hood ..................................................3-32

2. Headlamp ..........................................3-79

3. Fog lamp............................................3-82

4. Tires and wheels ...............................7-41

5. Outside rearview mirror .....................3-21

6. Front windshield wiper blades ...........3-88

7. Windows ............................................3-24

OHCR016001

E XT RIIO R O VE VIIE

■

Rear view


1. Antenna ................................................4-2

2. Doors ..................................................3-12

3. Fuel filler door.....................................3-38

4. Rear parking assist system ................3-92

5. Rear combination lamp ......................7-77

6. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-80

7. Rearview camera ...............................3-91

8. Trunk ...................................................3-33

1

OHCR016002

1-3


IIN TE R O

■

Left-hand drive

VE VIIE W

■ Type A ■ Type B


1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-12

2. Outside rearview mirror control switch ................................................3-21

3. Central door lock switch ....................3-15

4 Power window lock switch ..................3-26

5. Power window switches ....................3-24

6. Light control/Turn signals ..................3-79

7. Wiper/Washer ....................................3-88

8. Headlight leveling device ..................3-84

9. Instrument panel illumination control switch ....................................3-42

10. ESC OFF button..............................5-32

11. TPMS SET button..............................6-9

12. Hood release lever ..........................3-32

13. Fuel filler door opener ....................3-38

14. Trunk release lever ..........................3-33

15. Fuse box..........................................7-50

16. Steering wheel ................................3-18

17. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ..3-19

18. Seat ..................................................2-3

OHCI017003

1-4

■

Right-hand drive



1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-12

2. Outside rearview mirror control switch ................................................3-21

3. Central door lock switch ....................3-15

4 Power window lock switch ..................3-26

5. Power window switches ....................3-24

6. Light control/Turn signals ..................3-79

7. Wiper/Washer ....................................3-88

8. Headlight leveling device ..................3-84

9. Instrument panel illumination control switch ....................................3-42

10. ESC OFF button..............................5-32

11. TPMS SET button..............................6-9

12. Hood release lever ..........................3-32

13. Fuel filler door opener ....................3-38

14. Trunk release lever ..........................3-33

15. Fuse box..........................................7-50

16. Steering wheel ................................3-18

17. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ..3-19

18. Seat ..................................................2-3

OHCI017005MX

1-5

1


IIN ST RU ME T P AN L O VE VIIE

■

Left-hand drive


1. Steering wheel audio controls /

Bluetooth ® wireless technology hands-free controls ....................................4-3

2. Instrument cluster ....................................3-41

3. Horn .........................................................3-19

4. Driver's front air bag ................................2-40

5 . Key ignition switch /

Engine Start/Stop button ....................5-4/5-9

6. Manual transmission lever .......................5-18

7. Automatic transmission shift lever ...........5-21

8. Manual climate control /

Automatic climate control system ..3-96/3-105

9. Passenger's front air bag .........................2-40

10. Glove box .............................................3-119

OHCI017004

1-6

■

Right-hand drive


1. Steering wheel audio controls /

Bluetooth ® wireless technology hands-free controls ....................................4-3

2. Instrument cluster ....................................3-41

3. Horn .........................................................3-19

4. Driver's front air bag ................................2-40

5 . Key ignition switch /

Engine Start/Stop button ....................5-4/5-9

6. Manual transmission lever .......................5-18

7. Automatic transmission shift lever ...........5-21

8. Manual climate control /

Automatic climate control system ..3-96/3-105

9. Passenger's front air bag .........................2-40

10. Glove box .............................................3-119

1

OHCI017006R

1-7


E NG E C MP AR ME T

Kappa 1.4 MPI

Gamma 1.6 MPI

1-8

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-27

2. Radiator cap ......................................7-28

3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ................7-31

4. Air cleaner ........................................7-33

5. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-24

6. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-24

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir......7-32

8. Fuse box............................................7-51

9. Battery ..............................................7-38

OYC076001/OYC076002

UII 1.6 TCI


1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-27

2. Radiator cap ......................................7-28

3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ................7-31

4. Air cleaner ........................................7-33

5. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-24

6. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-24

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir......7-32

8. Fuse box............................................7-51

9. Battery ..............................................7-38

1

OHCI077060R

1-9

Safety system of your vehicle

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.

It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.

Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

Important safety precautions .............................2-2

Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2

Restrain all children .........................................................2-2

Air bag hazards ................................................................2-2

Driver distraction .............................................................2-2

Control your speed ..........................................................2-2

Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-2

Seats ........................................................................2-3

Safety precautions ..........................................................2-5

Front seats..........................................................................2-6

Rear seats ...........................................................................2-9

Headrest ...........................................................................2-11

Seat belts .............................................................2-15

Seat belt safety precautions ......................................2-15

Seat belt warning light .................................................2-16

Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-18

Additional seat belt safety precautions ...................2-23

Care of seat belts ..........................................................2-26

Child restraint system (CRS) .............................2-27

Children always in the rear .........................................2-27

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-28

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-29

Air bag - Supplemental restraint system .......2-37

Where are the air bags? ..............................................2-40

Air bag warning and indicator .....................................2-45

How does the air bags system operate? .................2-45

What to expect after an air bag inflates ................2-49

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? ...........2-51

SRS care ...........................................................................2-56

Additional safety precautions .....................................2-57

Air bag warning labels ..................................................2-58

2


IIM PO TA T S ET Y P EC AU TIIO S

You will find many safety precautions and recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.

Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of accidents. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with air bags,

ALWAYS make sure you and your passengers wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children

All children under age 13 should ride in your vehicle properly restrained in a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in an appropriate child restraint. Larger children should use a booster seat with the lap/shoulder belt until they can use the seat belt properly without a booster seat.

Air bag hazards

While air bags can save lives, they can also cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or who are not properly restrained.

2-2

Driver distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety should be the first concern when behind the wheel and drivers need to be aware of the wide array of potential distractions, such as drowsiness, reaching for objects, eating, personal grooming, other passengers, and using cellular phones.

Drivers can become distracted when they take their eyes and attention off the road or their hands off the wheel to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction and an accident:

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices

(i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is parked or safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device when allowed by laws and conditions permit safe use.

NEVER text or email while driving.

Most countries have laws prohibiting drivers from texting. Some countries and cities also prohibit drivers from using handheld phones.

• NEVER let the use of a mobile device distract you from driving. You have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to always drive safely, with your hands on the wheel as well as your eyes and attention on the road.

Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

S EA S

■

Left-hand drive

Front seat

1. Forward and backward

2. Seatback angle

3. Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)

4. Headrest

Rear seat

5. Seatback folding*

6. Armrest*

7. Headrest*

* : if equipped

2

OHCI037037

2-3


■

Right-hand drive

Front seat

1. Forward and backward

2. Seatback angle

3. Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)

4. Headrest

Rear seat

5. Seatback folding*

6. Armrest*

7. Headrest*

* : if equipped

OHCI037037R

2-4

Safety precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position plays an important role in driver and passenger safety together with the seat belts and air bags in an accident.

WARNING

Do not use a cushion that reduces friction between the seat and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate properly.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Sitting too close to an air bag greatly increases the risk of injury in the event the air bag inflates. Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following precautions:

• Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the rear as possible while maintaining the ability to maintain full control of the vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible.

• Hold the steering wheel by the rim with hands at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.

• NEVER place anything or anyone between the air bag.

• Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the dashboard to minimize the risk of leg injuries.

Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before starting any trip.

At all times, passengers should sit upright and be properly restrained.

Infants and small children must be restrained in appropriate child restraint systems. Children who have outgrown a booster seat and adults must be restrained using the seat belts.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat belt:

• NEVER use one seat belt for more than one occupant.

• Always position the seatback upright with the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips.

• NEVER allow children or small infants to ride in a passenger’s lap.

(Continued)

2

2-5


(Continued)

• Do not route the seat belt across your neck, across sharp edges, or reroute the shoulder strap away from your body.

• Do not allow the seat belt to become caught or jammed.

Front seats

The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat:

• NEVER attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

• Do not place anything under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver’s foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, causing an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position and proper locking of the seatback.

• Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may exit out of the lighter causing a fire.

• Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism.

• If there are occupants in the rear seats, be careful while adjusting the front seat position.

2-6

CAUTION

To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat while wearing your seat belt.

Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.

• Do not allow your hands or fingers to get caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.

Manual adjustment

OYC036002

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place. Move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

OYC036003

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

2

2-7


Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you.

During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger’s hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger’s neck will strike the shoulder belt.

OYC036004

Seat cushion height

(for driver’s seats)

To change the height of the seat cushion:

• Push down the lever several times, to lower the seat cushion.

• Pull up the lever several times, to raise the seat cushion.

2-8

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

OHCR036002

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the passenger’s seatbacks.

CAUTION

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure occupants.

Rear seats

Folding the rear seat

(if equipped)

The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use.

This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.

• Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

OHCR036003

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

2. Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position.

2

2-9


OHCR036004

3. Pull on the seatback folding lever

(1).

OHCR036017

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback rearward. Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place.

When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

WARNING

When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter the passenger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death.

OHCR036005

4. Fold the seatback toward the front of the vehicle.

2-10

WARNING

Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a collision causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

Make sure the engine is off, the shift lever is in P (Park), and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.

Headrest

The vehicle’s front and rear seats have adjustable headrests. The headrests provide comfort for passengers, but more importantly they are designed to help protect passengers from whiplash and other neck and spinal injuries during an accident, especially in a rear impact collision.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, take the following precautions when adjusting your headrests:

• Always properly adjust the headrests for all passengers

BEFORE starting the vehicle.

• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat with the headrest removed or reversed.

•

2

OLF034072N

Adjust the headrests so the middle of the headrests is at the same height as the height of the top of the eyes.

(Continued)

2-11


(Continued)

• NEVER adjust the headrest position of the driver’s seat when the vehicle is in motion.

• Adjust the headrest as close to the passenger’s head as possible. Do not use a seat cushion that holds the body away from the seatback.

• Make sure the headrest locks into position after adjusting it.

CAUTION

When there is no occupant in the rear seats, adjust the height of the headrest to the lowest position. The rear seat headrest can reduce the visibility of the rear area.

Front seat headrests

NOTICE

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or pull on the headrests.

ODH033105L

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats are equipped with adjustable headrests for the passengers safety and comfort.

OYC036008

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support.

2. Lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

2-12

OLF034015

NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the head restraint and seat cushion raised, the head restraint may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

OYC036009

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with using the seatback angle switch (1).

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button

(3) while pulling the headrest up

(4).

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to travel in a seat with the headrest removed or reversed.

OYC036010

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Recline the seatback.

2. Put the headrest poles (2) into the holes while pressing the release button (1).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.

4. Recline the seatback (4) with the seatback angle switch (3).

WARNING

Always make sure the headrest locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.

2-13

2


Rear seat headrests

*

* : if equipped

ODH033106L

The rear seats are equipped with headrests in all the seating positions for the passenger’s safety and comfort.

OHCR036006

Adjusting the height up and down

(if equipped)

To raise the headrest:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support.

2. Lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

2-14

S EA T B LT S

This section describes how to use the seat belts properly. It also describes some of the things not to do when using seat belts.

Seat belt safety precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting any trip. Air bags (if equipped) are designed to supplement the seat belt as an additional safety device, but they are not a substitute. Most countries require all occupants of a vehicle to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Seat belts must be used by ALL passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following precautions when adjusting and wearing seat belts:

• ALWAYS properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear seats.

• NEVER allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them in the seat.

• NEVER allow an infant or child to be carried on an occupant’s lap.

• NEVER ride with the seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving.

• Do not allow children to share a seat or seat belt.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

• Never wear a seat belt over fragile objects. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the seat belt can damage it.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is twisted. A twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.

• Do not use a seat belt if the webbing or hardware is damaged.

• Do not latch the seat belt into the buckles of other seats.

• NEVER unfasten the seat belt while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

• Make sure there is nothing in the buckle interfering with the seat belt latch mechanism.

This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.

(Continued)

2-15

2


(Continued)

• No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

WARNING

Damaged seat belts and seat belt assemblies will not operate properly. Always replace:

• Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing.

• Damaged hardware.

• The entire seat belt assembly after it has been worn in an accident, even if damage to webbing or assembly is not apparent.

Seat belt warning light

Seat belt warning

■

For driver in instrument cluster

OLMB033022

As a reminder to the driver, the driver's seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you place the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or if it is disconnected after the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the corresponding seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 20 km/h (12 mph) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the front passenger's seat belt warning system. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.

2-16

OTLE035082

Front passenger’s seat belt warning

(if equipped)

As a reminder to the front passenger, the front passenger’s seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned ON, the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

If you start to drive without the seat belt fastened or you unfasten the seat belt when you drive under

20km/h, the corresponding warning light will continue to illuminate until you fasten the seat belt.

If you continue to drive without the seat belt fastened or you unfasten the seat belt when you drive over

20km/h, the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the front passenger's seat belt warning system. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger to properly be seated as instructed in this manual.

i

Information

• You can find the front passenger’s seat belt warning light on the center fascia panel.

• Although the front passenger seat is not occupied, the seat belt warning light will blink or illuminate for 6 seconds.

• The front passenger's seat belt warning may operate when luggage is placed on the front passenger seat.

2

2-17


Seat belt restraint system

Lap/shoulder belt

NOTICE

If you are not able to smoothly pull enough of the seat belt out from the retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

ODH033055

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2).

There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and move with you. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position.

It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

2-18

OLMB033025

WARNING

Improperly positioned seat belts may increase the risk of serious injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Position the lap portion of the seat belt as low as possible across your hips, not on your waist, so that it fits snugly. This allows your strong pelvic bones to absorb the force of the crash, reducing the chance of internal injuries.

• Position one arm under the shoulder belt and the other over the belt, as shown in the illustration.

• Always position the shoulder belt anchor into locked position at the appropriate height.

• Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

Height adjustment (if equipped)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the three different positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be adjusted so it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.

■ Front seat

OYC036014

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

2

2-19


Rear center seat belt

■ Type A

ODH033057

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

■

Type B

OHCR036018

OHCR036009

When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be used.

2-20 i

Information

If you are not able to pull out the safety belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

(Driver and front passenger, if equipped)

OPD037077L

To release the seat belt:

When you want to release the seat belt, press the button (1) in the locking buckle.

WARNING

The center lap belt latching mechanism is different from those for the rear seat shoulder belts. When fastening the rear seat shoulder belts or the center lap belt, make sure they are inserted into the correct buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and assure proper operation.

ODH033058

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's Pre-tensioner

Seat Belts. The purpose of the pretensioner is to make sure the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in crashes where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position.

In certain frontal collisions, the pretensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

WARNING

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly in your seat.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is loose or twisted. A loose or twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.

• Do not place anything near the buckle. This may adversely affect the buckle and cause it to function improperly.

• Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an accident.

• NEVER inspect, service, repair or replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.

2-21

2


WARNING

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism deploys during a collision, the pre-tensioner can become hot and can burn you.

CAUTION

Body work on the front area of the vehicle may damage the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

Therefore, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OLMB033040/Q

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration above:

(1) SRS air bag warning light

(2) Retractor pre-tensioner

(3) SRS control module

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is placed to the ON position, and then it should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is not malfunctioning. If the warning light does not illuminate, stays illuminated or illuminates when the vehicle is being driven, we recommend the pre-tensioner seat belts and/or SRS air bags be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

2-22

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal or side collisions.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

Additional seat belt safety precautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used during pregnancy. The best way to protect your unborn child is to protect yourself by always wearing the seat belt.

Pregnant women should always wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away from your neck. Place the lap belt below your belly so that it fits SNUGLY across your hips and pelvic bone, under the rounded part of the belly.

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

Most countries have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices, including booster seats. The age at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among countries, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your country, and where you are travelling. Infant and child restraints must be properly placed and installed in a rear seat. For more information refer to the “Child Restraint Systems” in this chapter.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to an unborn child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER place the lap portion of the seat belt above or over the area of the abdomen where the unborn child is located.

2

2-23


WARNING

ALWAYS properly restrain infants and small children in a child restraint appropriate for the child’s height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to a child and other passengers, NEVER hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is moving.The violent forces created during an accident will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior of the vehicle.

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your country. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets

Safety Standard of your country. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to “Child Restraint

Systems” in this chapter.

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are too large for a booster seat must always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. A seat belt should lie across the upper thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child safely. Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system and/or seat belts in the rear seat.

If a larger child over age 13 must be seated in the front seat, the child must be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck, they need to be returned to an appropriate booster seat in the rear seat.

2-24

WARNING

• Always make sure larger children’s seat belts are worn and properly adjusted.

• NEVER allow the shoulder belt to contact the child’s neck or face.

• Do not allow more than one child to use a single seat belt.

Seat belt use and injured people

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported.

Consult a physician for specific recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly.

During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger’s hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger’s neck will strike the shoulder belt.

2

2-25


WARNING

• NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

• Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

• Driver and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. We recommend that you consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

2-26

C HIIL RE ST AIIN SY ST

Children always in the rear

WARNING

Always properly restrain children in the rear seats of the vehicle, unless the air bag on the front passenger seat is deactivated.

CR S))

Most countries have Child Restraint

Systems which require children to travel in approved Child Restraint

Systems. The laws governing the age or height/weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of Child Restraint System differs among countries, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your country, and where you are travelling.

Children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.

Child Restraint Systems must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available Child Restraint System that meets the requirements of the

Safety Standards of your country.

Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Children too large for a

Child Restraint System must use the seat belts provided.

Child Restraint Systems are generally designed to be secured in a vehicle seat by lap belt or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a top-tether and/or ISOFIX anchorage in the rear seats of the vehicle.

Child Restraint System (CRS) always in the rear

Infants and younger children must be restrained in an appropriate rearwardfacing or forward-facing CRS that has first been properly secured to the rear seat of the vehicle. Read and comply with the instructions for installation and use provided by the manufacturer of the Child Restraint System.

WARNING

• Always follow the Child Restraint

System manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

• Always properly restrain your child in the Child Restraint

System.

• Do not use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that “hooks” over a seatback, it may not provide adequate protection in an accident.

• After an accident, we recommend a HYUNDAI dealer check the Child Restraint System, seat belts, ISOFIX anchorages and top-tether anchorages.

2-27

2


Selecting a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

When selecting a CRS for your child, always:

• Make sure the CRS has a label certifying that it meets applicable

Safety Standards of your country.

• Select a Child Restraint System based on your child’s height and weight. The required label or the instructions for use typically provide this information.

• Select a Child Restraint System that fits the vehicle seating position where it will be used.

• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation and use provided with the Child

Restraint System.

Child Restraint System types

There are three main types of Child

Restraint Systems: rearward-facing seats, forward-facing seats, and booster seats. They are classified according to the child’s age, height and weight.

OLMB033041

Rearward-facing Child Restraint

System

A rearward-facing Child Restraint

System provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place, and in an accident, acts to keep the child positioned in the

Child Restraint Systems and reduce the stress to the fragile neck and spinal cord.

All children under the age of one year must always ride in a rearward-facing

Child Restraint System. There are different types of rearward-facing Child

Restraint Systems: infant-only Child

Restraint Systems can only be used rearward-facing. Convertible and 3-in-

1 Child Restraint Systems typically have higher height and weight limits for the rearward-facing position, allowing you to keep your child rearwardfacing for a longer period of time.

Keep using Child Restraint Systems in the rearward-facing position as long as children fit within the height and weight limits allowed by the Child

Restraint System's manufacturer.

2-28

OYC036016

Forward-facing Child Restraint

System

A forward-facing Child Restraint

System provides restraint for the child’s body with a harness. Keep children in a forward-facing Child

Restraint System with a harness until they reach the top height or weight limit allowed by your Child Restraint

System’s manufacturer.

Once your child outgrows the forwardfacing Child Restraint System, your child is ready for a booster seat.

Booster seats

A booster seat is Child Restraint

System designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat belt system. A booster seat positions the seat belt so that it fits properly over the stronger parts of your child’s body. Keep your children in booster seats until they are big enough to fit in a seat belt properly.

For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap belt must lie comfortable across the upper thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder belt should lie comfortable across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck or face. Children under age 13 must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

Installing a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

WARNING

Before installing your Child

Restraint System always:

Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the Child Restraint System.

Failure to follow all warnings and instructions could increase the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a Child

Restraint System, the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

2

2-29


After selecting a proper Child Restraint

System and checking that the Child

Restraint System fits properly in the rear of this vehicle, you are ready to install the Child Restraint System according to the manufacturer’s instruction. There are three general steps in installing the Child Restraint

Systems properly:

• Properly secure the Child

Restraint System to the vehicle.

All Child Restraint System must be secured to the vehicle with the lap belt or lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the ISOFIX top-tether and/or ISOFIX anchorage.

• Make sure the Child Restraint

System is firmly secured.

After installing a Child Restraint System to the vehicle, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is securely attached to the seat. A Child Restraint

System secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, some side-toside movement can be expected.

When installing a Child Restraint

System, adjust the vehicle seat (up and down, forward and rearward) so that your child fits in the Child

Restraint System in a comfortable manner.

• Secure the child in the Child

Restraint System.

Make sure the child is properly strapped in the

Child Restraint System according to the Child Restraint System manufacturer’s instructions.

CAUTION

A Child Restraint System in a closed vehicle can become very hot. To prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the

Child Restraint System.

ISOFIX anchorage and top-tether anchorage (ISOFIX anchorages system) for children

The ISOFIX system holds a Child

Restraint System during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to make installation of the

Child Restraint System easier and reduce the possibility of improperly installing your Child Restraint System.

The ISOFIX system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the

Child Restraint System. The ISOFIX system eliminates the need to use seat belts to secure the Child

Restraint System to the rear seats.

ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each ISOFIX seating position that will accommodate a

Child Restraint System with lower attachments.

To use the ISOFIX system in your vehicle, you must have a Child

Restraint System with ISOFIX attachments. (An ISOFIX Child Restraint

System may only be installed if it has vehicle-specific or universal approval in accordance with the requirements of ECE-R44 or ECE-R129.)

2-30

The Child Restraint System manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the Child

Restraint System with its attachments for the ISOFIX anchorages.

WARNING

Do not attempt to install a Child

Restraint System using ISOFIX anchorages in the rear center seating position. There are no

ISOFIX anchorages provided for this seat. Using the outboard seat anchorages, for the CRS installation on the rear center seating position, can damage the anchorages.

OLM039035

ISOFIX anchorages have been provided in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There are no ISOFIX anchorages provided for the center rear seating position.

ISOFIX Anchorage

Position Indicator

ISOFIX Lower

Anchorage

OYC036018

The ISOFIX anchorages symbols are located on the left and right rear seat cushions to identify the position of the ISOFIX anchorages in your vehicle (see arrows in illustration).

Both rear outboard seats are equipped with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well as a corresponding top-tether anchorage on the back side of the rear seats.

(Child Restraint Systems with universal approval according to ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 need to be fixed additionally with a top-tether connected to the back side of the rear seats.)

2

2-31


ISOFIX anchorages are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions.

To use the ISOFIX anchorages, push the upper portion of the ISOFIX anchorage cover.

Securing a Child Restraint

System with the “ISOFIX

Anchorage System”

To install a ISOFIX-compatible Child

Restraint System in either of the rear outboard seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away from the ISOFIX anchorages.

2. Move any other objects away from the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the

Child Restraint System and the

ISOFIX anchorages.

3. Place the Child Restraint System on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the ISOFIX anchorages according to the instructions provided by the Child Restraint System manufacturer.

4. Follow the instructions of the Child

Restraint System's manufacturer for proper installation and connection of the ISOFIX attachments on the Child Restraint System to the

ISOFIX anchorages.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the ISOFIX system:

• Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your Child Restraint System.

• To prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts, buckle all unused rear seat belts and retract the seat belt webbing behind the child. Children can be strangled if a shoulder belt becomes wrapped around their neck and the seat belt tightens.

• NEVER attach more than one

Child Restraint System to a single anchorage. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.

• Always have the ISOFIX system inspected by your dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the ISOFIX system and may not properly secure the Child Restraint System.

2-32


System seat with “Top-tether

Anchorage” system

OYC036019

Child Restraint hook holders are located on the package tray.

OYC036020

1. Route the Child Restraint System seat strap over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrest, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

2. Connect the top-tether to the toptether anchorage, then tighten the top-tether according to the instructions of your Child Restraint

System's manufacturer to firmly attach the Child Restraint System to the seat.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when installing the top-tether:

• Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your Child Restraint System.

• NEVER attach more than one

Child Restraint System to a single ISOFIX top-tether anchorage. This could cause the anchorage or attachment to come loose or break.

• Do not attach the top-tether to anything other than the correct top-tether anchorage. It may not work properly if attached to something else.

• Child Restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted Child Restraint

System.

Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

2-33

2


Child Seat Restraint for Vehicle ISOFIX Positions

Suitability of each seating position for ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations.

Vehicle ISOFIX Positions

Mass Group Size Class Fixture 2nd row

Front Passenger

Carrycot

0 : UP to 10kg

0+ : UP to 13kg

I : 9 to 18kg

D

C

D

C

E

E

F

G

B

B1

A

ISO/L1

ISO/L2

ISO/R1

ISO/R1

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

ISO/F2

ISO/F2X

ISO/F3

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Left Hand

X

X

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IUF, IL

IUF, IL

IUF, IL

Center

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Right Hand

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

X

X

IUF, IL

IUF, IL

IUF, IL

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.

IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the

"specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.

X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.

2-34


System with a lap/shoulder belt

When not using the ISOFIX system, all Child Restraint Systems must be secured to a rear seat with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

i

Information

When using the rear center seat belt, you should also refer to the “Rear

Center Seat Belt” in this chapter.

OLMB033044

Installing a Child Restraint System with a lap/shoulder belt

To install a Child Restraint System on the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the Child Restraint System on a rear seat and route the lap/ shoulder belt around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Make sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

OLMB033045

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.

i

Information

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

OLMB033046

3. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the Child Restraint System while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

4. Push and pull on the Child

Restraint System to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place.

If your CRS manufacturer instructs or recommends you use a ISOFIX toptether anchorage with the lap/shoulder belt, see page 2-35.

To remove the Child Restraint System, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

2-35

2


Child Seat Restraint Suitability for Seat Position using the Seat Belt

Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations

Use Child Restraint Systems that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children.

When using the Child Restraint Systems, refer to the following table.

Seating Position

Mass Group

Front

Passenger

Outboard Left

Second row

Center

(3 POINT BELT)

Center

(2 POINT BELT)

Outboard Right

Group 0

(0 - 9 months)

Group 0+

(0 - 2 years)

Group I

(9 months - 4 years)

Group II

(15 to 25 kg)

Group III

(22 to 36 kg) up to 10 kg up to 13 kg

9 to 18 kg

15 to 25 kg

22 to 36 kg

X

X

X

X

X

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U : Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group

UF : Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group

X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group

UF

UF

UF

UF

UF

U

U

U

U

U

2-36

R B AG - S

■

Left-hand drive

UP LE EN AL ES TR T S YS M

1. Driver’s front air bag*

2. Passenger’s front air bag*

3. Side air bag*

4. Curtain air bag*

* : if equipped

2

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OHCR036010

2-37


■

Right-hand drive

2-38

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Driver’s front air bag*

2. Passenger’s front air bag*

3. Side air bag*

4. Curtain air bag*

* : if equipped

OHCI037032R

Vehicles are equipped with a

Supplemental Air Bag System for the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seats.

The front air bags are designed to supplement the three-point seat belts. For these air bags to provide protection, the seat belts must be worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed in an accident if you are not wearing a seat belt. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, but do not replace them. Also, air bags are not designed to deploy in every collision.

In some accidents, the seat belts are the only restraint protecting you.

WARNING

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

2

2-39


Where are the air bags?

Driver’s and passenger’s air bags (if equipped)

■ Driver’s front air bag

■ Passenger’s front air bag

OYC036022

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions.

The SRS consists of frontal air bags which are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The air bags are labeled with the letters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad covers.

The purpose of the frontal SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and front passengers with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating front air bags, take the following precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

• Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

• Never lean against the door or center console.

• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.

• No objects (such as crash pad cover, cellular phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

2-40

OYC036023

■

Type A

■

Type A

OHCI037040R OHCI037039R

OHCI037043R

Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch (if equipped)

The purpose of the switch is to disable the passenger’s front air bag in order to transport occupants who are at increased risk for air bag-related injury due to age, size, or medical condition.

■ Type B ■ Type B

OHCI037042R

To deactivate the passenger’s front air bag:

Insert the key or a similar rigid device into the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch and turn it to the

OFF position. The passenger air bag

OFF indicator ( ) will illuminate and stay on until the passenger’s front air bag is reactivated.

OHCI037041R

To reactivate the passenger’s front air bag:

Insert the key or a similar rigid device into the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch and turn it to the ON position. The passenger air bag ON indicator ( ) will illuminate and stay on for 60 seconds.

2-41

2

Safety system of your vehicle i

Information

The passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

WARNING

Never allow an adult passenger to ride in the front passenger seat when the passenger air bag OFF indicator is illuminated. During a collision, the air bag will not inflate if the indicator is illuminated. Turn on the passenger’s front air bag or have your passenger move to the rear seat.

WARNING

If the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the following conditions may occur:

• The air bag warning light ( ) on the instrument cluster will illuminate.

• The passenger air bag OFF indicator ( ) will not illuminate and the ON indicator ( ) will come on and go off after approximately 60 seconds.

The passenger’s front air bag will inflate in a frontal impact even though the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position.

• We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch and the SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

Side air bags (if equipped)

OYC036024

OYC036025

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle’s driver and the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

2-42

The side air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating side air bag, take the following precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

• Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Hold the steering wheel at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock positions, to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.

• Do not use any accessory seat covers. This could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.

• Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.

• Do not place any objects between the door and the seat.

They may become dangerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.

• Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not put any objects between the side air bag label and seat cushion. It could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

• Do not cause impact to the doors when the ignition switch is in the ON position or this may cause the side air bags to inflate.

• If the seat or seat cover is damaged, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2

2-43


Curtain air bags (if equipped)

OHCR036011

OHCR036019

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

2-44

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact.

The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating curtain air bags, take the following precautions:

• All seat occupants must wear seat belts at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

• Properly secure child restraints as far away from the door as possible.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.

• Do not hang hard or breakable objects on the clothes hanger.

• Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.

• Do not open or repair the side curtain air bags.

Air bag warning and indicator

(if equipped)

Air bag warning light

W7-147

The purpose of the air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag - Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned

ON, the warning light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position.

How does the air bags system operate?

ODH033104L/Q

The SRS consists of the following components:

(1) Driver's front air bag module

(2) Passenger's front air bag module

(3) Side air bag modules

(4) Curtain air bag modules

(5) Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

(6) Air bag warning light

(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)

(8) Front impact sensors

(9) Side impact sensors

2

2-45


The SRSCM continually monitors

SRS components while the ignition switch is in the ON position to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

WARNING

If your SRS malfunctions, the air bag may not inflate properly during an accident increasing the risk of serious injury or death.

If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:

• The light does not turn on for approximately six seconds when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately six seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the engine is running.

We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the

SRS as soon as possible if any of these conditions occur.

During a frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle’s deceleration. If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags, at the time and with the force needed.

The front air bags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the side air bags help provide protection in the event of a side impact by supporting the side upper body area.

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

• Air bags inflate in the event of certain frontal or side collisions to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.

• Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and it’s direction . These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

2-46

• Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle impacts during a collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

• To help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.

However, the rapid air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.

You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. The greatest risk is sitting too close to the air bag. An air bag needs space to inflate. It is recommended that drivers sit as far as possible between the center of the steering wheel and the chest while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

2

2-47


■ Driver’s front air bag (1) ■ Driver’s front air bag (2) ■ Driver’s front air bag (3)

OLMB033056

■ Passenger’s front air bag

OLMB033054

When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

OLMB033055

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the front passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

OLMB033057

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

2-48

WARNING

To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when the passenger's air bag inflates:

• Do not install or place any objects (drink holder, CD holder, stickers, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box where the passenger's air bag is located.

• Do not install a container of liquid air freshener near the instrument cluster or on the instrument panel surface.

What to expect after an air bag inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates, it will deflate very quickly. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer. Curtain air bags may remain partially inflated for some time after they deploy.

WARNING

After an air bag inflates, take the following precautions:

• Open your windows and doors as soon as possible after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder released by the inflating air bag.

• Do not touch the air bag storage area’s internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated. The parts that come into contact with an inflating air bag may be very hot.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Always wash exposed skin areas thoroughly with cold water and mild soap.

• We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.

Air bags are designed to be used only once.

2-49

2


Noise and smoke from inflating air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and may produce smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. The powder may aggravate asthma for some people. If you experience breathing problems after an air bag deployment, seek medical attention immediately.

Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and seek medical attention if the symptoms persist.

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger seat

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYDESA2042

OLM034310

Never install a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. An inflating air bag can forcefully strike a child or restraint resulting in serious or fatal injury.

WARNING

• Extreme hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it!

• NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI-

OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

• Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries.

2-50

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision?

Air bags are not designed to inflate in every collision.

There are certain types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether or not an air bag should have inflated.

Air bag collision sensors

(if equipped)

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an air bag deploying unexpectedly and causing serious injury or death:

• Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of the sensors is altered, the air bags may deploy when they should not or may not deploy when they should.

• Do not install bumper guards or replace the bumper with a non-genuine part. This may adversely affect the collision and air bag deployment performance.

• Place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, when the vehicle is being towed to prevent inadvertent air bag deployment.

• We recommend that all air bag repairs are conducted by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2

2-51


1. SRS control module

2. Front impact sensor

3. Side impact sensor (B-pillar)

OHCR036012/OYC036029/OHCR036013/OHCR036014

2-52

Air bag inflation conditions

OLF034050

.

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the severity of impact of the front collision.

OHCR036019

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the severity of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

OLF034051

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

2

2-53


Air bag non-inflation conditions

OAD035047

In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts.

OAD035048

Front air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not provide any additional benefit.

OLF034055

Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move in the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

However, side and curtain air bags may inflate depending on the severity of impact.

2-54

ODH033076

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

OAD035050

Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to “ride” under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such

“underride” collisions.

OLF034057

Air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

i

Information

The side and/or curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision, if the vehicle is equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.

2-55

2


OLF034058

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

SRS care

The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is in the

ON position, or continuously remains on, we recommend that the system be immediately inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

We recommend any work on the

SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails be performed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death take the following precautions:

• Do not attempt to modify or disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.

• Do not place objects over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box.

• Clean the air bag pad covers with a soft cloth moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.

• We recommend that inflated air bags be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

2-56

(Continued)

• If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for the necessary information.

Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of personal injury.

Additional safety precautions

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving.

A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or be ejected from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat belts.

Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front seats.

Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors.

Impact to the doors when the ignition switch is in the ON position may cause the air bags to inflate.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

2

2-57


Air bag warning labels (if equipped)


OYC036034 OYC036034/H

Air bag warning labels are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

Be sure to read all of the information about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owner’s Manual

2-58

Convenient features of your vehicle

Keys .........................................................................3-3

Record your key number ................................................3-3

Key operations ...................................................................3-3

Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-5

Remote key .......................................................................3-5

Remote key precautions..................................................3-6

Smart key ...........................................................................3-8

Smart key precautions...................................................3-10

Immobilizer system .........................................................3-11

Door locks ............................................................3-12

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle .....3-12

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ........3-14

Auto door lock/unlock features ................................3-16

Child-protector rear door locks ..................................3-16

Theft-alarm system.............................................3-17

Steering wheel......................................................3-18

Electric power steering (EPS)......................................3-18

Tilt steering / Telescope steering...............................3-19

Horn....................................................................................3-19

Mirrors...................................................................3-20

Inside rearview mirror....................................................3-20

Outside rearview mirror ................................................3-21

Windows ................................................................3-24

Power windows ..............................................................3-24

Sunroof ................................................................3-28

Sunroof opening and closing.......................................3-28

Sliding the sunroof .........................................................3-28

Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-29

Sunshade ...........................................................................3-30

Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-30

Exterior features .................................................3-32

Hood ...................................................................................3-32

Trunk ..................................................................................3-33

Smart trunk.......................................................................3-35

Fuel filler door .................................................................3-38

Instrument cluster................................................3-41

Instrument cluster control ............................................3-42

Gauges ...............................................................................3-42

Odometer...........................................................................3-45

Transmission shift indicator .........................................3-45

Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-46

LCD display messages ..................................................3-58

LCD display (for type B).....................................3-65

LCD display control.........................................................3-65

LCD modes ........................................................................3-65

User settings mode.........................................................3-68

Trip computer .......................................................3-71

Type A ................................................................................3-71

Type B ...............................................................................3-75

3

3

Light .......................................................................3-79

Exterior lights ..................................................................3-79

Interior lights....................................................................3-85

Wipers and washers ............................................3-88

Windshield wipers ..........................................................3-88

Windshield washers .......................................................3-89

Driver Assist System ...........................................3-91

Rear view camera ...........................................................3-91

Rear parking assist system ..........................................3-92

Defroster...............................................................3-94

Rear window defroster..................................................3-94

Manual climate control system..........................3-96

Heating and air conditioning........................................3-97

System operation ..........................................................3-101

System maintenance ....................................................3-103

Automatic climate control system ...................3-105

Automatic heating and air conditioning ..................3-106

Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-107

System operation ..........................................................3-112

System maintenance ....................................................3-114

Windshield defrosting and defogging ............3-116

Manual climate control system .................................3-116

Automatic climate control system ............................3-117

Defogging logic..............................................................3-118

Climate control additional features.................3-118

Cluster ionizer................................................................3-118

Storage compartment........................................3-119

Center console storage ...............................................3-119

Glove box ........................................................................3-119

Sunglass holder .............................................................3-120

Multi box ......................................................................3-120

Interior features ...............................................3-121

Ashtray ............................................................................3-121

Cup holder.......................................................................3-121

Sunvisor...........................................................................3-122

Power outlet...................................................................3-123

USB Charger...................................................................3-124

Cigarette lighter ............................................................3-125

Clock.................................................................................3-125

Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-126

Floor mat anchor(s)......................................................3-126

K YS

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped or printed on the key code tag attached to the key set.

Should you lose your keys, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations

OHCR046031

• Used to start the engine.

• Used to lock and unlock the doors.

WARNING

Ignition key

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous even if the key is not in the ignition switch. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch.

(Continued)

(Continued)

The ignition key would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

WARNING

Use only HYUNDAI original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.

3

3-3


When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts.

Keep each key separate in order to avoid a starting malfunction.

NOTICE

Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch.

Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from starting.

i i

Information

Information

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, we recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling.

Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

NOTICE

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction.We recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

3-4

A CC SS G Y UR

Remote key

VE HIIC E

OHCR046001

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and trunk) and even start the engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Trunk Unlock

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and trunk.

2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on the remote key.

3. The doors will lock. The hazard warning lights will blink.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Door Unlock button (2) on the remote key.

2. The doors will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

i

Information

After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

WARNING

Do not leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

Unattended children could place the key in the ignition switch and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

Trunk unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Trunk Unlock button (3) on the remote key for more than one second.

2. The hazard warning lights will blink two times. Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will lock automatically.

i

Information

• After unlocking the trunk, the trunk will lock automatically.

(Continued)

3

3-5


(Continued)

• The word "HOLD" is written on the button to inform you that you must press and hold the button for more than one second.

Start-up

For detailed information refer to “Key

Ignition Switch” in chapter 5.

Mechanical key

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the remote key:

• Keep the remote key away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the remote key gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may malfunction, excluding the car from the warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the remote key.

• Protect the remote key from extreme temperatures.

OHCR046333

If the remote key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key.

To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically.

To fold the key, fold the key manually while pressing the release button.

NOTICE

Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may damage the key.

Remote key precautions

The remote key will not work if any of the following occur:

• The key is in the ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).

• The remote key battery is weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The remote key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the remote key.

When the remote key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the remote key, it is recommended that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the remote key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals.

3-6

This is especially important when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the remote key and your mobile phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

Battery replacement

If the remote key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

If you suspect your remote key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your remote key is not working correctly, it is recommended that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) and regulation.

i

Information

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

Keep the remote key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

OPD046002

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the cover.

2. Remove the old battery and insert the new battery. Make sure the battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the remote key.

3

3-7


Smart key Locking

OHCR046334

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and trunk) and even start the engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Trunk Unlock

OHCR046002

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and trunk.

2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Lock button (1) on the smart key.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

i

Information

The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within

0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside door handle.

3-8

Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for three seconds if any of the following occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

• The Engine Start/Stop button is in

ACC or ON position.

WARNING

Do not leave the Smart Key in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could press the Engine Start/

Stop button and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

Unlocking

OHCR046002

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.

2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.

3. The doors will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

i

Information

• The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside door handle. Other people can also open the doors without the smart key in possession.

• After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting the key.

For detailed information refer to the Engine Start/Stop button in chapter 5.

Trunk unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Either press the trunk handle button or press the Trunk Unlock button (3) on the smart key for more than one second.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will lock automatically.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the smart key:

• Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the smart key gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may malfunction, excluding the car from the warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the smart key.

• Protect the smart key from extreme temperatures.

i

Information

After unlocking the trunk, the trunk will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless the trunk is opened.

3-9

3


Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you happen to lose your smart key, it is recommended that you should immediately take the vehicle and remaining key to your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.

If the smart key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the smart key and your mobile phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

OPD046045

Press and hold the release button (1) and remove the mechanical key (2).

Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

Smart key precautions

The smart key will not work if any of the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the smart key.

• The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

• Another vehicle’s smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, it is recommended that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

Keep the smart key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

3-10

Battery replacement

OPDE046046

If the Smart Key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart key.

2. Remove the old battery and insert the new battery. Make sure the battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the smart key.

If you suspect your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, it is recommended that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) and regulation.

Immobilizer system

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential.

Vehicles without smart key system

With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks and determines and verifies if the ignition key is valid or not.

If the key is valid, the engine will start.

If the key is invalid, the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

3-11

3


Vehicles with smart key system

Whenever the engine start/stop button is changed to the ON position, the immobilizer system checks and verifies if the key is valid or not.

If the key is valid, the engine will start.

If the key is invalid, the engine will not start.

D OO R L CK S

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle

Mechanical key

■

Type A

To deactivate the immobilizer system

Change the engine start/stop button to the ON position.

■ Type B

To activate the immobilizer system

Change the engine start/stop button to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically.

Without a valid smart key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

■

Type C

OHCR046029

OYC046004

OHCR046335

Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock.

If you lock/unlock the driver's door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

3-12

Remote key

OHCR046001

To lock the doors, press the Door

Lock button (1) on the remote key.

To unlock the doors, press the Door

Unlock button (2) on the remote key.



i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

Smart key

OHCR046002

OHCR046334

To lock the doors, press the button on the outside door handle while carrying the smart key with you or press the door lock button (1) on the smart key.

3

3-13


To unlock the doors, press the button on the outside door handle while carrying the smart key with you or press the door unlock button (2) on the smart key.



Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

• If the inner door handle of the driver’s and front passenger’s door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button is unlocked and door opens.

• Front doors cannot be locked if the key is in the ignition switch and any front door is open.

• Doors cannot be locked if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is open.

i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

OHCR046003

• To unlock a door, pull the door lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position.

The red mark (2) on the door lock button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

i

Information

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.

Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.

Lower a front window and use the mechanical key to unlock the door from outside.

3-14

With the central door lock switch

OHCR046004

When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

• If the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

WARNING

The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion. If the doors are unlocked, the risk of being thrown from the vehicle in a crash is increased.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or serious injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

Always secure your vehicle

Leaving your vehicle unlocked increases the potential risk to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, while depressing the brake, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (for automatic transmission) or first gear or R (Reverse, for manual transmission), engage the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position, close all windows, lock all doors, and always take the key with you.

WARNING

Opening a door when something is approaching may cause damage or injury. Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door.

3-15

3


Auto door lock/unlock features

Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically unlocked when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Child-protector rear door locks

To lock the child safety lock, insert a key (or screwdriver) (1) into the hole and turn it to the lock position.

To allow a rear door to be opened from inside the vehicle, unlock the child safety lock.

Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (9 mph).

You can activate or deactivate the

Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from the User Settings Mode on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to

"LCD Display" in this chapter.

OHCR046005

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on the edge of each rear door. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open if the inner door handle is pulled.

WARNING

If children accidently open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should always be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

3-16

T HE TLA M S ST M ((IIF QU PE

This system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously if any of the following occurs:

The Theft Alarm System will not set if the hood, the trunk, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the hood, the trunk, or the doors are fully closed.

- A door is opened without using the remote key or smart key.

- The trunk is opened without using the remote key or smart key.

- The engine hood is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds, then the system resets. To turn off the alarm, unlock the doors with the remote key or smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automatically sets 30 seconds after you lock the doors and the trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors and the trunk from outside the vehicle with the remote key or smart key or by pressing the button on the outside of the door handles with the smart key in your possession.

The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set, opening any door, the trunk, or the hood without using the remote key or smart key will cause the alarm to activate.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

If the vehicle is locked by using a mechanical key, the security system doesn’t operate.

i

Information

• Do not lock the doors until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the remaining passenger leaves the vehicle when the system is armed, the alarm will be activated.

• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the remote key or smart key, open the doors by using the mechanical key and place the ignition switch in the ON position (for remote key) or start the engine (for smart key) and wait for 30 seconds.

• When the system is disarmed but a door or trunk is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

OJC040170 i

Information

Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm system will have a label attached to the vehicle with the following words:

1. WARNING

2. SECURITY SYSTEM

3-17

3


S TE RIIN G W HE L

Electric power steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

Also, the steering effort becomes heavier as the vehicle’s speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed decreases for better control of the steering wheel.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally, the warning light ( ) will illuminate on the instrument cluster.

The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate. Take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked as soon as possible.

i

Information

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high immediately after placing the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position.

This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics.

When the diagnostics is completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the ignition switch is placed to the ON or LOCK/OFF position (Without Smart key system).

A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON or OFF position.

(With Smart key system)

• Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

• When the vehicle is stationary, if you turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel effort increases.

This is not a system malfunction. As time passes, the steering wheel effort will return to its normal condition.

3-18

Tilt steering / Telescope steering

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driving. You may lose steering control and cause severe personal injury, death or accidents.

Horn

i

Information

After adjustment, sometimes the lockrelease lever may not lock the steering wheel.

It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.

OHCI047006R

Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on the steering wheel column and adjust the steering wheel angle (2) and position (3, if equipped). Move the steering wheel, so it points toward your chest, not toward your face.

Make sure you can see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

After adjusting, pull up the lockrelease lever (1) to lock the steering wheel in place. Push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position. Always adjust the position of the steering wheel before driving.

OYC046009

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

NOTICE

Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist.

Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

3

3-19


MIIR RO S

Inside rearview mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the rearview mirror to the center on the view through the rear window.

WARNING

Make sure your line of sight is not obstructed. Do not place objects in the rear seat, cargo area, or behind the rear headrests which could interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during an accident or deployment of the air bag, do not modify the rearview mirror and do not install a wide mirror.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Day/night rearview mirror

Night

NOTICE

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Day

OHCR046008

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

3-20

Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlamp of the vehicle behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions.

When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror. The sensor detects the light level around the vehicle, and automatically adjusts to control the headlamp glare from vehicles behind you.

Whenever the shift lever is placed in

R (Reverse), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the driver’s view behind the vehicle.

II II n d ii ii c a tt tt o rr rr

Outside rearview mirror

OHCI047032

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position.

OHCR046012

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors.

The mirror can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch.

The mirror heads can be folded to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street.

3

3-21


WARNING

• The right outside rearview mirror is convex. In some countries, the left outside rearview mirror is also convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror or turn your head and look to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while driving.

This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass.

• If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water, or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

OHCR046011

Adjusting the rearview mirrors:

Move the lever (1) to the L (Left) or R

(Right) to select the rearview mirror you would like to adjust.

Use the mirror adjustment control (2) to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

After adjustment, move the lever (1) to the middle to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

3-22

NOTICE

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand or the motor may be damaged.

Folding the outside rearview mirror

OHCR046012

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

OHCI047653

Electric type (if equipped)

The outside rearview mirror can be folded or unfolder by pressing the switch.

NOTICE

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the ignition switch is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

NOTICE

Do not fold the electric type outside rearview mirror by hand. It could cause motor failure.

3-23

3


WIIN DO S

Power windows

OHCI047013R

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch*

(4) Rear door (right) power window switch*

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window*

(7) Power window lock switch

* : if equipped

3-24

WARNING

To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows while driving.

Window opening and closing

To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) opened (or partially opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is normal and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly close the sunroof.

OHCR046014

To open:

Press the window switch down to the first detent position (5). Release the switch when you want the window to stop.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first detent position (5). Release the window switch when you want the window to stop.

Auto down window

(For driver’s side, if equipped)

Pressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the window even when the switch is released.

Auto up/down window

(For driver’s side, if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the window and continue pulling up on the power window switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, it is recommended that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-25

3


Automatic reversal (if equipped)

OLF044032

If a window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will stop and lower approximately 30 cm

(12 inches) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).

If the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.

3-26 i

Information

The automatic reverse feature is only active when the “Auto Up” feature is used by fully pulling up the switch to the second detent.

WARNING

Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 4 mm (0.16

inch) in diameter caught between the window glass and the upper window channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the window will not stop and reverse direction.

Power window lock switch

OHCR046015

The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passengers' doors by pressing the power window lock switch.

When the power window lock switch is pressed:

• The driver's master control can operate all the power window.

• The front passenger's control can only operate the front passenger's power window.

• The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passengers' power window.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock switch in the LOCK position. Serious injury or death can result from unintentional window operation by a child.

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

WARNING

• NEVER leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the engine is running.

• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or otherwise injure themselves or others.

• Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.

• Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock switch in the LOCK position (pressed). Serious injury can result from unintentional window operation by the child.

• Do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows while driving.

3-27

3


S UN OO F E QU PE

Sunroof opening and closing Sliding the sunroof

Pressing the sunroof control lever backward or forward momentarily to the second detent position completely opens or closes the sunroof even when the switch is released. To stop the sunroof at the desired position while the sunroof is in operation, press the sunroof control lever backward or forward and release the switch.

OYC046018

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control switch located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

OYC046019

To open:

Press the sunroof control lever backward to the first detent position.

Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop.

To close:

Press the sunroof control lever backward to the first detent position.

Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop.

i

Information

To reduce wind noise while driving, it is recommended that you drive with the sunroof slightly closed (stop the sunroof about 5 cm before the maximum slide open position).

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the sunroof and the motor, do not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is in the fully open, closed or tilt position(s).

3-28

Automatic reversal Tilting the sunroof

OLFC044035CN

If the sunroof senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction then stop to allow the object to be cleared.

The auto reverse function does not work if a small obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash.

You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

OYC046020

Tilt the sunroof open:

Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

To close the sunroof:

Press the sunroof lever forward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

WARNING

• Make sure heads, other body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the sunroof to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

• Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

• To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.

3

3-29


NOTICE

• Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the sunroof guide rail or between the sunroof and roof panel, which can make a noise.

• Do not try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the motor could be damaged. In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly.

i

Information

After washing the vehicle or after a rain, be sure to wipe off the water on the sunroof before operating the sunroof.

Sunshade

OAD045037

The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof when the glass panel moves. If you want it closed, move the sunshade manually.

NOTICE

The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.

Resetting the sunroof

Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the followings)

- Battery is discharged or disconnected or the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected

- The one-touch sliding function of the sunroof does not normally operate

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON position or start the engine. It is recommended to reset the sunroof while the engine is running.

2. Push the control lever forward. The sunroof will close completely or tilt depending on the condition of the sunroof.

3. Release the control lever until the sunroof does not move.

3-30

4. Push the control lever forward about 10 seconds.

- When the sunroof is in the close position :

The glass will tilt and slightly move up and down.

- When the sunroof is in the tilt position:

The glass will slightly move up and down.

Do not release the lever until the operation is completed.

If you release the lever during operation, try again from step 2.

6. Release the sunroof control lever after all operation has completed.

(The sunroof system has been reset.) i

Information

• If the sunroof does not reset when the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is blown, the sunroof may not operate normally.

• For more detailed information, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

5. Within 3 seconds, push the control lever forward until the sunroof operates as follows:

Tilt down

→

Slide Open

→

Slide

Close.

Do not release the lever until the operation is completed.

If you release the lever during operation, try again from step 2.

3-31

3


E XT RIIO R F EA RE S

Hood

Opening the hood

OYC046021

1. Park the vehicle and set the parking brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

OHCI047016R

3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push the secondary latch up (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).

4. Pull out the support rod.

OHCI047017R

5. Hold the hood opened with the support rod (3).

WARNING

Support rod

• Grasp the support rod in the area wrapped in rubber. The rubber will help prevent you from being burned by hot metal when the engine is hot.

• The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.

3-32

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the following:

• All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood halfway (lifted approximately 30cm from the closed position) and push down to securely lock in place. Then double check to be sure the hood is secure.

WARNING

• Before closing the hood, ensure all obstructions are removed from around hood opening.

• Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away.

Check there is no hood open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster. Driving with the hood opened may cause a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed, which might result in an accident, and the hood could fall or be damaged.

Trunk

Opening the trunk

1. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park, for automatic transmission) or first gear or R (Reverse, for manual transmission) and set the parking brake.

■

Outside

OHCR046018

2. Then do one of the following :

- Press the Remote key or Smart

Key Trunk Unlock button for more than one second.

- Press the button on the trunk itself with the Smart Key in your possession.

3

3-33


■ Inside

OYC046026

- Use the trunk release lever.

3. Lift the trunk lid up.

Closing the trunk

Lower the trunk lid and press down until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again.

WARNING

Always keep the trunk lid completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases containing carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle and serious illness or death may result.

i

Information

To prevent damage to the trunk lift cylinders and the attached hardware, always close the trunk before driving.

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and trunk mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

WARNING

• NEVER allow anyone to occupy the trunk of the vehicle at any time. If the trunk is partially or totally latched and the person is unable to get out, serious injury or death could occur due to lack of ventilation, exhaust fumes and rapid heat build-up, or because of exposure to cold weather conditions. The trunk is also a highly dangerous location in the event of a crash because it is not a protected occupant space but is a part of the vehicle’s crush zone.

• Your vehicle should be kept locked and keys should be kept out of the reach of children. Parents should teach their children about the dangers of playing in trunks.

• Use the release lever for emergencies only.

3-34

Smart trunk (if equipped)

OHCR046020

On a vehicle equipped with a smart key, the trunk can be opened using the Smart Trunk system.

i

Information

• The Smart Trunk does not operate when:

- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and is continuously detected.

- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and 1.5 m from the front door handles.

- A door is not locked or closed.

- The smart key is in the vehicle.

OHCI047679R

1. Setting

To activate the Smart Trunk, go to

User Settings Mode and select

Smart Trunk on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

How to use the Smart Trunk

The trunk can be opened with notouch activation satisfying all the conditions below.

• After 15 seconds when all doors are closed and locked

• Positioned in the detecting area for more than 3 seconds.

3

3-35


OHCR046021

2. Detect and Alert

If you are positioned in the detecting area (50 ~100 cm behind the vehicle) carrying a smart key, the hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound to alert you the smart key has been detected and the trunk will open.

i

Information

Do not approach the detecting area if you do not want the trunk to open. If you have unintentionally entered the detecting area and the hazard warning lights and chime starts to operate, leave the detecting area with the smart key. The trunk will stay closed.

OHCR046022

3. Automatic opening

The hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound several times and then the trunk will slowly open.

3-36

WARNING

• Make sure you close the trunk before driving your vehicle.

• Make sure there are no people or objects around the trunk before opening or closing the trunk.

• Make sure objects in the trunk do not come out when opening the trunk on a slope. It may cause serious injury.

• Make sure to deactivate the

Smart Trunk when washing your vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk may open inadvertently.

• The key should be kept out of reach of children. Children may inadvertently open the

Smart Trunk while playing around the rear area of the vehicle.

How to deactivate the Smart

Trunk function using the smart key

1. Door lock

2. Door unlock

3. Trunk open

OHCR046334

If you press any button of the smart key during the Detect and Alert stage, the Smart Trunk function will be deactivated.

Make sure to be aware of how to deactivate the Smart Trunk function for emergency situations.

i

Information

• If you press the door unlock button

(2), the Smart Trunk function will be deactivated temporarily. But, if you do not open any door for 30 seconds, the smart trunk function will be activated again.

• If you press the trunk open button

(3) for more than 1 second, the trunk opens.

• If you press the door lock button (1) or trunk open button (3) when the

Smart Trunk function is not in the

Detect and Alert stage, the smart trunk function will not be deactivated.

• In case you have deactivated the

Smart Trunk function by pressing the smart key button and opened a door, the smart trunk function can be activated again by closing and locking all doors.

Detecting area

OHCR046023

• The Smart Trunk operates with a welcome alert if the smart key is detected within 50~100 cm from the trunk.

• The alert stops at once if the smart key is positioned outside the detecting area during the Detect and Alert stage.

3

3-37

Convenient features of your vehicle i

Information

• The Smart Trunk function will not work if any of the following occurs:

- The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

- The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

- Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

• The detecting range may decrease or increase when :

- One side of the tire is raised to replace a tire or to inspect the vehicle.

- The vehicle is slantingly parked on a slope or unpaved road, etc.

Fuel filler door

Opening the fuel filler door

OYC046027

The fuel filler door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel filler door opener.

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Push the fuel filler door opener button.

3-38

OHCR046024

3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to fully open.

4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2), turn it counterclockwise. You may hear a hissing noise as the pressure inside the tank equalizes.

5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

WARNING

• Your diesel vehicle is equipped with the specially-designed breakaway valve inside the filler inlet to prevent accidental fuel blending with gasoline.

The fuel inlet of your diesel vehicle cannot be fitted with a standard gasoline nozzle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Do not forcefully insert a standard gasoline nozzle into the filler inlet of your diesel vehicle.

It may damage your vehicle.

• Some gas stations may still use standard gasoline nozzles for diesel refueling. If you find that a diesel nozzle is narrower than the fuel filler inlet diameter of your diesel vehicle, we recommend you to find/visit another gas station, which is equipped with standard diesel nozzles.

• Fully insert a standard diesel nozzle into the filler inlet to open the breakaway valve. If the nozzle is not fully inserted into the filler inlet, it causes diesel fuels to flow out of the fuel tank.

i

Information

If the fuel filler door does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the door to break the ice and release the door. Do not pry on the door. If necessary, spray around the door with an approved deicer fluid (do not use radiator antifreeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Closing the fuel filler door

1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it clockwise until it “clicks” one time.

2. Close the fuel filler door until it is latched securely.

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station.

• Before refueling, note the location of the Emergency

Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate the potential build-up of static electricity by touching a metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling. You can generate a buildup of static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric capable of producing static electricity.

Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

3-39

3


(Continued)

• When refueling, always move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (for automatic transmission or first gear or R

(Reverse, for manual transmission), set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

• When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact between your bare hand and the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.

• Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

(Continued)

3-40

(Continued)

• Do not use matches or a lighter and do not smoke or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station, especially during refueling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your vehicle tank, which can cause gasoline spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns.

Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

i

Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel Requirements" suggested in the Introduction chapter.

NOTICE

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

IIN ST RU ME T C LU TE R

■ Type A (Conventional cluster)

■

Type B (Supervision cluster)

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

3

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the "Gauges and meters" in this chapter.

OHCI047100/OHCI047101

3-41


Instrument cluster control

Instrument panel illumination


Gauges

Speedometer

■ km/h ■ MPH, km/h

OHCI047381R

When the vehicle's parking lights or headlights are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

When pressing the illumination control button, the interior switch illumination intensity is also adjusted.

WARNING

Never adjust the instrument cluster while driving. This could result in loss of control and lead to an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

3-42

OAD045115/OHCR046110

• The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is displayed.

• If the brightness reaches to the maximum or minimum level, a chime will sound.

OYC046104/OHCI047691

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or miles per hour (MPH).

Tachometer

■ Gasoline engine ■ Diesel engine

Engine Coolant Temperature gauge


WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap or reservoir cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

3

OYC046124/OHCI047663R

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

OYC046125/OHCR046108

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTICE

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.

NOTICE

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the

"130 or H (Hot)" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the Engine

Overheats" in chapter 6.

3-43


Fuel Gauge


OYC046126/OHCR046109

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

i

Information

• The fuel tank capacity is given in chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

3-44

WARNING

Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the "0 or E

(Empty)" level.

NOTICE

Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.

Outside Temperature Gauge

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures either in

Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit.

- Temperature range :

-40°C ~ 60°C (-40°F ~ 140°F)

The outside temperature on the display may not immediately change like a general thermometer not to distract the driver.

The temperature unit (from °C to °F or from °F to °C) can be changed by:


Odometer


Transmission shift indicator

Automatic Transmission Shift

Indicator (if equipped)

■

Type A

■

Type B

OHCI047150/OHCI047111

• For type A

- Press the TRIP button for more than

5 seconds on the steering wheel.

• For type B

- User Settings mode in the Cluster :

You can change the temperature unit in the “Other Features -

Temperature unit” .

- Automatic climate control system :

While pressing the OFF button, press the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.

The temperature unit of the instrument cluster and climate control system will change at once.

OAD045119/OHCR046112

The odometer indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

OAD045185N/OHCR046128

This indicator displays which shift lever is selected.

• Park : P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

• Drive : D

3-45

3


Manual Transmission Shift

Indicator (if equipped)


Gear Position Pop-up

(if equipped)

Warning and indicator lights

i

Information

Make sure that all warning lights are

OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

OAD045185N/OHCR046129

This indicator informs which gear is desired while driving to save fuel.

• Shifting up :

▲

2,

▲

3,

▲

4,

▲

5,

▲

6

• Shifting down : ▼ 1, ▼ 2, ▼ 3, ▼ 4, ▼ 5

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the

3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or

1st gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th,

5th, or 6th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

3-46

OHCR046130

The pop-up that indicates the current gear position is displayed in the cluster for about 2 seconds when shifting into other positions (P/R/N/D).

Air Bag Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with the SRS.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the “Seat

Belts” in chapter 2.



ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds

- It remains on if the parking brake is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low.

3

3-47


If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7) . After adding brake fluid, check all brake components for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is found, or if the warning light remains on, or if the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure is required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system).


3-48

Electronic Brake force

Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally.


WARNING

Electronic Brake force

Distribution (EBD) System

Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking.

(Continued)

(Continued)

In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking.

We recommend you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

i

Information

- Electronic

Brake force Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning

Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, we recommend you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Electric Power

Steering (EPS)

Warning Light



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the EPS.


3

3-49


Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the emission control system.


NOTICE

Driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control systems which could affect drivability and/or fuel economy.

NOTICE

- Gasoline Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

- Diesel Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) blinks, some error related to the injection quantity adjustment occurs which could result in loss of engine power, combustion noise and poor emission.

In this case, we recommend that you have the engine control system inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Charging System

Warning Light



ON position.

- It remains on until the engine is started.

• When there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system:


2. Turn the engine off and check the alternator drive belt for looseness or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly, there may be a problem in the electrical charging system.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

3-50

Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light



ON position.

- It remains on until the engine is started.

• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:


2. Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7) .

If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

• If the engine does not stop immediately after the Engine Oil

Pressure Warning Light is illuminated, severe damage could result.

• If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, it indicates that there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case,

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine is started, turn the engine off immediately. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Low Fuel Level

Warning Light


• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel level below "0 or E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).

3

3-51


Overspeed Warning

Light (if equipped)

120 km/h

Master Warning Light

(for supervision cluster)

Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light blinks:

• When you drive the vehicle more than 120 km/h.

- This is to prevent you from driving your vehicle with overspeed.

- The overspeed warning chime also sounds for approximately 5 seconds.

This indicator light illuminates:

• Once you turn the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.


• When there is a malfunction in operation in any of the following systems:

- Low Engine Oil

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS, if equipped)

To identify the details of the warning, look at the LCD display.


• Once you turn the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.


• When one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated (The location of the underinflated tire is displayed on the supervision cluster LCD display).


“Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

3-52

This warning light remains ON after blinking for approximately 60 seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON and OFF in 3 second intervals:

• When there is a malfunction with the TPMS.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.


“Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

Fuel Filter Warning

Light (for diesel engine)


• When water has accumulated inside the fuel filter.

In this case, remove the water from the fuel filter.

For more details, refer to "Fuel

Filter" in chapter 7.

WARNING

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

NOTICE

• When the Fuel Filter Warning

Light illuminates, engine power

(vehicle speed & idle speed) may decrease.

• If you keep driving with the warning light on, engine parts (injector, common rail, high pressure fuel pump) may be damaged. If this occurs, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Exhaust System (DPF)

Warning Light

(for diesel engine, if equipped)


• When there is a malfunction with the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system.

When this warning light illuminates, it may turn off after driving the vehicle:

- at more than 60 km/h (37 mph), or

- above 2nd gear with 1500 ~ 2500 engine rpm for a certain time (for about 25 minutes).

If this warning light blinks in spite of the procedure (at this time LCD warning message will be displayed), we recommend that you have the

DPF system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

If you continue to drive with the

DPF warning light blinking for a long time, the DPF system can be damaged and fuel consumption can worsen.

3-53

3


Glow Indicator Light

(for diesel engine)


• When the engine is being preheated with the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position.

- The engine can be started after the glow indicator light goes off.

i

Information

If the engine does not start within 10 seconds after the preheating is completed, set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the

LOCK or OFF position for 10 seconds and then to the ON position in order to preheat the engine again.

Door Ajar Warning

Light (for conventional cluster)


• When a door is not closed securely.

Trunk Open Warning

Light (for conventional cluster)

depending on the with the engine coolant temperature, air temperature, and battery condition.


• When the trunk is not closed securely.

If the indicator light remains on or blinks after the engine has warmed up or while driving, there may be a malfunction with the engine preheating system.


3-54

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator




ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the ESC system.


This indicator light blinks:

• While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light

(if equipped)

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (without smart key) (if equipped)



ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately

3 seconds and then goes off.

• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.


• When the vehicle detects the immobilizer in the key with the ignition switch in the ON position.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.


• When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


3

3-55


Immobilizer Indicator

Light (with smart key)

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle with the

Engine Start/Stop button in the

ACC or ON position.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:

• When the smart key is not in the vehicle.

- At this time, you cannot start the engine.

This indicator light illuminates for

2 seconds and goes off:

• If the smart key is in the vehicle and the Engine Start/Stop button is

ON, but the vehicle cannot detect the smart key.


Turn Signal Indicator

Light


• When you operate the turn signal indicator light.


• When the battery voltage of the smart key is low.

- At this time, you can not start the engine. However, you can start the engine if you press the

Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key.

(For more details, refer to "Starting the Engine" in chapter 5).

• When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


If any of the following occurs, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system.

- The turn signal indicator light illuminates but does not blink

- The turn signal indicator light blinks rapidly

- The turn signal indicator light does not illuminate at all

If either of these conditions occur, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-56

High Beam Indicator

Light

Rear Fog Indicator



• When the headlights are on and in the high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.


• When the rear fog lights are on.

Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped)

■

Type A

Light ON Indicator

Light

■ Type B

Cruise SET Indicator



• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to "Cruise

Control System" in chapter 5.

3


• When the tail lights or headlights are on.

Front Fog Indicator



• When the cruise control system is enabled.

For more details, refer to "Cruise

Control System" in chapter 5.


• When the front fog lights are on.

3-57


LCD display messages

Shift to "P" position

(for smart key system and for automatic transmission)

■ Type B

Low Key Battery

(for smart key system)

■ Type B

Press start button while turning wheel (for smart key system)

■ Type B

OHCR046113

This warning message is displayed if you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in P (Park) position.

At this time, the Engine Start/Stop button turns to the ACC position (If you press the Engine Start/Stop button once more, it will turn to the ON position).

OHCR046114

This warning message is displayed if the battery of the smart key is discharged while changing the Engine

Start/Stop button to the OFF position.

OHCR046115

This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the Engine Start/Stop button is pressed.

You should press the Engine

Start/Stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left.

3-58

Steering wheel unlocked


■ Type B

Check steering wheel lock system (for smart key system)

■ Type B

Press brake pedal to start engine (for smart key system and for automatic transmission)

■ Type B

3

OHCI047116

This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not lock while the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the OFF position.

OHCI047117

This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not lock normally while the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the OFF position.

OHCR046118

This warning message is displayed if the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal.

You can start the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal.

3-59


Press clutch pedal to start engine (for smart key system and manual transmission)

■ Type B

Key not in vehicle


■ Type B

Key not detected


■ Type B

OHCR046119

This warning message is displayed if the Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the clutch pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal to start the engine.

OHCI047121

This warning message is displayed if the door is opened or closed when the engine Start/Stop button in the

ACC position. Have the smart key with you when you press the engine

Start/Stop button.

OHCI047120

This warning message is displayed if there is no smart key in the vehicle or the key is not detected when the engine Start/Stop button is pressed.

The immobilizer indicator is also illuminated.

3-60

Press start button again


■ Type B

Press “START” button with key


■ Type B

Check "BRAKE SWITCH" fuse

(for smart key system and for automatic transmission)

■ Type B

3

OHCR046122

This message is displayed if you were unable to start the vehicle when the Engine Start/Stop button was pressed.

If this occurs, attempt to start the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button again.

If the warning message appears each time you press the Engine

Start/Stop button, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OHCR046123

This warning message is displayed if you press the Engine Start/Stop button while the warning message “Key not detected” is displayed.

At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

OHCR046124

This warning message is displayed if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.

You need to replace the fuse with a new one before starting the engine.

If that is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in the ACC position.

3-61


Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine (for smart key system and for automatic transmission)

■ Type B

Door, Hood, Trunk Open

■ Type B

Lights mode

OHCR046125

This warning message is displayed if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position.

i

Information

You can start the engine with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. But, for your safety, we recommend that you start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

OHCR046126

This warning is displayed indicating which door, or the hood, or the trunk is open.

If the door/trunk open warning message is blocked with another warning message, an icon will appear on the top of the LCD display.

CAUTION

Before driving the vehicle, you should confirm that the door/ hood/trunk is fully closed. Also, check there is no door/hood/ trunk open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster.

OHCI047637

This indicator displays which exterior light is selected using the lighting control.

3-62

Wiper mode


Icy Road Warning Light

(if equipped)


Low Tire Pressure (if equipped)

■ Type B

3

OHCI047375/OHCR046375

This indicator displays which wiper speed is selected using the wiper control.

OAD045186N/OHCR046127

This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.

When the temperature on the outside temperature gauge is approximately below 4°C (40°F), the Icy Road Warning

Light and Outside Temperature Gauge blinks 10 times, and then illuminates.

Also, the warning chime sounds 1 time.

i

Information

If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

OHCR046144

This warning message is displayed if the tire pressure is low. The corresponding tire on the vehicle will be illuminated.

For more details, refer to "Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

3-63


Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)

■ Type B

Low Fuel

■ Type B

Engine has overheated

■ Type B

OHCR046131

This warning message is displayed in the service reminder mode if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.

Have the washer fluid reservoir refilled.

OHCR046132

This warning message is displayed if the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.

When this message is displayed, the low fuel level warning light in the cluster will come on.

It is recommended to look for the nearest fueling station and refuel as soon as possible.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

OHCR046133

This warning message is displayed with a warning chime when the engine coolant temperature is above

120°C (248°F). This means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer to "Overheating" in chapter 6.

3-64

L CD DIIS PL Y ((F R T

LCD display control

PE

LCD modes

Modes

Trip Computer

Information

OHCR046030

The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons.

(1) : MODE button for changing modes

(2) , : MOVE switch for changing items

(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for setting or resetting the selected item

User Settings

Symbol or or

Explanation

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.

For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

3

This mode displays warning messages related to the vehicle systems.

In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

3-65


Edit settings after shifting to P /

Edit settings after engaging parking brake


Trip computer mode

The trip computer mode displays information related to vehicle driving parameters including fuel economy, trip meter information and vehicle speed.

For more details, refer to "Trip

Computer" in this chapter.

Information mode

OHCR046146/OHCR046147

This warning message appears if you try to adjust the User Settings while driving.

- Automatic transmission

For your safety, change the User

Settings after parking the vehicle, applying the parking brake and moving the shift lever to P (Park).

- Manual transmission

For your safety, change the User

Settings after engaging the parking brake.

3-66

OHCR046139

This mode displays the service interval

(mileage and days).

Service interval

Service in

It calculates and displays the maintenance schedule (mileage or days), as set in the system.

When the set mileages or days passed, "Service in" message is displayed for several seconds each time ignition switch is turned ON.

OHCR046141

Service required

If you exceed the specified service interval, a message indicating,

"Service required" will be displayed each time you turn ON the vehicle.

To reset the service interval in mileages or days that you initially set:

- Activate the reset mode by pressing the OK button for more than 5 second, then press the OK button again for more than 1 second (for

Europe).

- Press the OK button for more than

1 second (except Europe).

OHCR046140

Service Interval OFF

If the service interval is not set,

"Service in OFF" message is displayed on the LCD display.

OHCI047680R

Warning message

If one of followings occurs, warning messages will be displayed in the information mode for several seconds.

- Low Tire Pressure

- Service reminder i

Information

If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

3-67

3


User settings mode

In this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.

Door

Items Explanation

Automatic Lock

• Disable : The automatic door lock operation will be deactivated.

• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h

(9.3mph).

• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

Automatic Unlock

Smart Trunk

(if equipped)

• Disable : The automatic door unlock operation will be canceled.

• On key out : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop button is set to the OFF position.

• Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the driver's door is unlocked.

• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.

If this item is checked, the smart trunk function will be activated.

For more details, refer to "Smart Trunk" in this chapter.

3-68

Light

Items

One Touch Turn Signal

HeadLamp Escort

Explanation

• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.

• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

For more details, refer to "Light" in this chapter.

• If this item is checked, the Headlamp Escort function will be activated.

3

Convenience

Items

Wiper/Lights Display

Explanation

If this item is checked, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you change the mode.

Gear Position Pop-up If this item is checked, the gear position will be displayed when you move the shift lever.

3-69


Service interval

Items

Service Interval

Explanation

In this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period

(days)

• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.

• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and days).

For more details, refer to "Information Mode" in this chapter.

Other features

Items Explanation

Average Fuel Consumption

Auto reset

• Off : The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.

• After Ignition : The average fuel economy will reset automatically whenever it has passed 4 hours after turning OFF the engine.

• After Refueling : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.

For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (Km/L, L/100km)

Temperature Unit

Language

Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)

Choose the language.

3-70

T RIIP OM UT R

Type A

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

i

Information

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Trip modes

FUEL ECONOMY

• Distance To Empty

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [A]

• Elapsed Time [A]

• Average Vehicle Speed [A]

TRIP B

• Tripmeter [B]

• Elapsed Time [B]

• Average Vehicle Speed [B]

Service Information

Digital Speed ON/OFF

OHCI047662R

To change the trip mode, press the

TRIP button on the steering wheel.

3

3-71


Fuel economy

OAD045151

Distance To Empty (1)

• The distance to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.

- Distance range:

1 ~ 9999 km or 1 ~ 9999 mi.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will display "----" as distance to empty.

i

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the distance to empty function may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 3 liters (1 gallon) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance to empty may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.

- Fuel economy range:

0.0 ~ 99.9 L/100km, km/L or MPG

• To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the RESET button on the steering wheel for more than

1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instantaneous fuel economy while driving when the vehicle speed is greater than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).


0~30 L/100km, km/L or 0~50 MPG

3-72

Trip A/B

OAD045152

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.

- Distance range:

0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or mi.

• To reset the tripmeter, press the

RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.

Elapsed Time (2)

• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time reset.

- Time range (hh:mm):

00:00 ~ 99:59

• To reset the elapsed time, press the

RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the elapsed time is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (3)

• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset.

- Speed range:

0 ~ 240 km/h or 0 ~ 160 MPH

• To reset the average vehicle speed, press the RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

i

Information

The elapsed time will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.) i

Information

• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance is less than 300 meters (0.19 miles) or the driving time is less than 10 seconds since the ignition switch or the Engine

Start/Stop button is turned to ON.

• The average vehicle speed will continue to be calculated and will start to decrease if the vehicle is stopped while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

3

3-73


Service information Digital speedometer

OAD045179N

If the remaining mileage or time reaches 1,500 km (900 miles) or 30 days, the service symbol ( ) will blink for several seconds each time you set the ignition switch or Engine

Start/Stop button to the ON position.

i

Information

To change or deactivate the service interval, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OAD045182N

If you exceed the specified service interval, the service symbol ( ) will blink each time you turn ON the vehicle.

To reset the service interval, press the RESET button for more than 5 seconds and then when the miles and days blink press the RESET button for more than 1 second.

If the service interval is not set, the service symbol ( ) will not be displayed.

OAD045177N/OAD045176N

This message shows the speed of the vehicle (in mph, km/h).

To turn the digital speedometer ON and OFF press the RESET button for more than 1 second when the digital speedometer is displayed.

3-74

Type B

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

Trip modes

Fuel Economy


• Instant Fuel Economy i

Information

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Accumulated Info

• Tripmeter


• Elapsed Time

Drive Info

• Tripmeter


• Elapsed Time

Digital Speedometer

OHCR046030

To change the trip mode, toggle the

“ , ” switch on the steering wheel.

3

3-75


Fuel economy

OHCR046134

Distance To Empty (1)

• The distance to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.

- Distance range:

1 ~ 9999 km or 1 ~ 9999 mi.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will display "----" as distance to empty.

i

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the distance to empty function may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters (2 gallon) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance to empty may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.


0.0 ~ 99.9 L/100km, km/L or MPG

• The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automatically.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the [OK] button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average fuel economy after refueling, select the

"Auto Reset" mode in User Settings menu on the LCD display.

- After Ignition: The average fuel economy will reset automatically whenever it has passed 4 hours after turning

OFF the engine.

3-76

- After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically when driving speed exceeds 1 km/h, after adding 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel or more.

Accumulated Info display


The accumulated driving information will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.) i

Information

The average fuel economy may be inaccurate, when the vehicle drives shorter than 300 meters (0.19 miles) after turning ON the Engine Start/Stop button.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instantaneous fuel economy while driving when the vehicle speed is greater than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).


0~30 L/100km, km/L or 0~50 MPG

OHCR046135/OHCR046148

This display shows the accumulated trip distance (1), the average fuel economy (2), and the total driving time (3).

The information is calculated starting from the last reset.

To manually reset the information, press and hold the OK button when viewing the Accumulated driving info.

The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and total driving time will reset simultaneously.

i

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

3

3-77


Digital speedometer Driving Info display


To manually reset the information, press and hold the OK button when viewing the Driving info. The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and total driving time will reset simultaneously.

The driving information will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

OHCR046137

This message shows the speed of the vehicle (km/h, MPH).

OHCR046136/OHCR046149

This display shows the trip distance

(1), the average fuel economy (2), and the total driving time (3).

The information is calculated for each ignition cycle. The driving information data gets initialized, when it has passed 4 hours after turning OFF the engine. In other words, the last driving information is available 4 hours after you have turned on the engine.

i

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

3-78

LIIG T

Exterior lights

Lighting control

■ Left-hand drive

• Type A

• Type B

OTL045251L

OHCR046361

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) AUTO light position (if equipped)

(3) Position lamp position

(4) Headlamp position

OHCI047320

AUTO light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO position, the position lamp and headlamp will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in operation, it is recommended to manually turn ON the lamps when driving at night or in a fog, or when you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.

NOTICE

• Do not cover or spill anything on the sensor (1) located on the instrument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleanser may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the

AUTO light system may not work properly.

3

3-79


High beam operation

OTL045253L

Position lamp position ( )

The position lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned

ON.

OTL045252L

Headlamp position ( )

The headlamp, position lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

i

Information

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlamp.

OTL045255L

To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lever will return to its original position.

The high beam indicator will light when the headlamp high beams are switched on.

To turn off the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you. The low beams will turn on.

3-80

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles approaching you. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

Turn signals and lane change signals

One-touch turn signal function

To activate an one-touch turn signal function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times.

You can activate/deactivate the One

Touch Turn Signal function or choose the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7) from the User Settings Mode on the

LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

3

OTL045254L

To flash the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you, then release the lever. The high beams will remain ON as long as you hold the lever towards you.

OTL045257L

To signal a turn, push down on the lever for a left turn or up for a right turn in position (A). To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B).

The lever will return to the OFF position when released or when the turn is completed.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

3-81


Front fog lamp (if equipped)

1. Turn on the position lamp.

2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front fog lamp position.

3. To turn off the front fog lamp, turn the light switch to the front fog lamp position again or turn off the position lamp.

Rear fog lamp (if equipped)

OPDE046066

Fog lamps are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.

Use the switch next to the headlamp switch to turn the fog lamps ON and

OFF.

NOTICE

When in operation, the fog lamps consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lamps when visibility is poor.

OPDE046064

Vehicle with front fog lamp

To turn on the rear fog lamp:

Position the light switch in the position lamp position, turn the light switch to the front fog lamp position, and then turn the lamp switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.

3-82

OTLE045285

Vehicle without front fog lamp

To turn on the rear fog lamp:

Position the light switch in the headlamp position, and then turn the light switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.

To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one of the following:

• Turn off the headlamp switch.

• Turn the light switch to the rear fog lamp position again.

• When the light switch is in the position lamp position, if you turn off the front fog lamp, the rear fog lamp will also turn off.

Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the position lamp when the driver turns the engine off and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the position lamps will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lamps on when the engine is turned off, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the position lamps OFF and

ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Headlamp delay function

(if equipped)

If you place the ignition switch in the

ACC or OFF position with the headlamps ON, the headlamps (and/or position lamps) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, with the engine off if the driver’s door is opened and closed, the headlamps (and/or position lamps) are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlamps (and/or position lamps) can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the remote key or smart key twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or AUTO position.

However, if you turn the light switch to the AUTO position when it is dark outside, the headlamps will not be turned off.

You can activate or deactivate the

Headlamp Delay function from the

User Settings Mode on the LCD display.


"LCD Display" in this chapter.

3

3-83


NOTICE

If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver's door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlamp delay function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, It causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

Headlight leveling device

(if equipped)

Daytime running light (DRL)

(if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day, especially after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedicated lamp OFF when:

1. The headlights or front fog lights

(if equipped) are in the ON position.

2. The engine is turned off.

3. The the Parking Brake is applied.

OHCI047360

To adjust the headlight beam level according to the number of the passengers and loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch.

The higher the number of the switch position, the lower the headlight beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper leveling position, or headlights may dazzle other road users.

Listed below are the examples of proper switch settings. For loading conditions other than those listed below, adjust the switch position so that the beam level may be the nearest as the condition obtained according to the list.

Loading condition

Driver only

Driver + Front passenger

Full passengers (including driver)


+ Maximum permissible loading

Driver + Maximum permissible loading

(For U2 1.6 Engine)


+ Maximum Permissible loading

Switch position

0

0

1

2

3

1

3-84

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position and all doors (and trunk) are closed and locked, the room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is pressed on the remote key or smart key.

• When the button of the outside door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the room lamp will turn off immediately.

Interior lights

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is turned off or the battery will discharge.

WARNING

If it does not work properly even though your car is inclined backward according to passenger's posture, or the headlight beam is irradiated to the high or low position, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to inspect or replace the wiring yourself.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

(if equipped)

The interior lamps will automatically go off approximately 20 minutes after the engine is turned off and the doors closed. If the doors are locked by the remote key or smart key and the vehicle enters the armed stage of the theft alarm system, the lamps will go off five seconds later.

3

3-85


Front lamps

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type C

(1) Front Map Lamp

(2) Front Door Lamp

(3), (4) Front Room Lamp

If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC position or the OFF position, the front and rear lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.

OHCI047352R

Front Map Lamp (1) :

Press either of these lens to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

Front room lamp

• ON (3) ( ):

Press the button to turn ON the room lamp for the front/rear seats.

Re-press the button to turn OFF the room lamp.

OHCR046324

OHCI047028R

Front Door Lamp

• DOOR (2) ( ) :

The front or rear room lamps come on when the front or rear doors are opened if the engine is running or not.

When doors are unlocked by the remote key or smart key, the front and rear lamps come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The front and rear room lamps go out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is in the ON position or all doors are locked, the front and rear lamps will turn off.

• OFF (4) ( ):

Press the button to turn OFF the room lamp for the front/rear seats.

3-86

Rear lamps Trunk room lamp

OHCR046355

Rear Room Lamp Switch :

Press this button to turn the room lamp on and off.

OYC046034

The trunk room lamp comes on when the trunk is opened.

NOTICE

Do not leave the lamp switches on for an extended period of time when the engine is turned off.

NOTICE

The trunk lamp comes on as long as the trunk lid is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the trunk lid securely after using the trunk.

3

3-87


WIIP ER S A ND SH ER

■ Left-hand drive

• Type A

• Type B

3-88

■ Right-hand drive

OYC046403

OHCR046356

OHCI047688R

A : Wiper speed control (front)

· / MIST – Single wipe

· O / OFF – Off

· --- / INT – Intermittent wipe

AUTO* – Auto control wipe

· 1 / LO– Low wiper speed

· 2 / HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment/Auto control wipe time adjustment*

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

/MIST : For a single wiping cycle, move the lever down ( ) or up (MIST) and release it. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

O/OFF : Wiper is not in operation

---/INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals.

Use this mode in light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob.

1/LO : Normal wiper speed

2/HI : Fast wiper speed i

Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.

AUTO (Automatic) control

(if equipped)

Windshield washers

WARNING

To avoid personal injury from the windshield wipers, when the engine is running and the windshield wiper switch is placed in the AUTO mode:

• Do not touch the upper end of the windshield glass facing the rain sensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end of the windshield glass with a damp or wet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on the windshield glass.

OHCI047689

The rain sensor located on the upper end of the windshield glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the wiper operates.

When the rain stops, the wiper stops.

To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is in the ON position, the wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system. Set the wiper to OFF position when the wiper is not in use.

NOTICE

• When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the OFF position to stop the auto wiper operation. The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode while washing the vehicle.

• Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass.

Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

OYC046419

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers

1-3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, you may need to add washer fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

3-89

3


WARNING

• ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are not any objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.

• Be aware that some objects may not be visible on the screen or be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor.

Operation of the Rear Parking

Assist System

Operating condition

• This system will activate when backing up with the ignition switch in the ON position. However, if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not detect objects.

• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph), the system will not warn you even though objects are detected.

• When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound and indicator

Types of warning sound

When an object is approximately

60 to 120 cm (24 to 47 in) from the rear bumper, the warning sound beeps intermittently.

When an object is approximately

30 to 60 cm (12 to 24 in) from the rear bumper, the warning sound beeps more frequently.

When an object is within approximately 30 cm (12 in) from the rear bumper, the warning sound beeps continuously.

Indicator

3-90

WARNING

When the outside temperature is below freezing, ALWAYS warm the windshield using the defroster to prevent the washer fluid from freezing on the windshield and obscuring your vision which could result in an accident and serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather.

D RIIV R A SIIS T S TE M

Rear view camera (if equipped)

OHCR046323

3

OHCR046324

The Rear View Camera will activate when the engine is running and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

3-91


This is a supplemental system that provides a view of the area behind the vehicle through the A/V display while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position.

WARNING

The rear camera display is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the rear camera display when backingup.

• ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.

CAUTION

Do not use any cleanser containing acid or alkaline detergents when cleaning the lens.

Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.

Rear parking assist system

(if equipped)

i

Information

Always keep the camera lens clean. The camera may not work normally if the lens is covered with dirt or snow.

Sensor

OHCR046325

The Rear Parking Assist System assists the driver during reverse movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within approximately

120 cm (50 in) behind the vehicle.

This system is a supplemental system that senses objects within the range and location of the sensors, it cannot detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed.

NOTICE

• The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting into R

(Reverse) position, this may indicate a malfunction with the

Parking Assist System. If this occurs, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Non-operational conditions of

Parking Assist System

The Rear Parking Assist System may not operate normally when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with dirt or debris such as snow or ice, or the sensor cover is blocked.

There is a possibility of the Rear

Parking Assist System malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces such as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or gradient.

• Objects generating excessive noise such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes can interfere with the sensor.

• Heavy rain or water spray is present.

• Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are present near the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with snow.

• Any non-factory equipment or accessories have been installed, or if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified.

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold.

• Undetectable objects smaller than

1 m (40 inches) and narrower than

14 cm (6 inches) in diameter.

The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles.

• Objects, which tend to absorb sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.

Rear parking assist system precautions

• The rear parking assist system may not operate consistently in some circumstances depending on the speed of the vehicle and the shapes of the objects detected.

• The rear parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged. Any non-factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor performance.

3-93

3


• The sensor may not recognize objects less than 40 cm (15 in) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is blocked with snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the rear parking assist system may be inoperative until the snow or ice melts, or the debris is removed. Use a soft cloth to wipe debris away from the sensor.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor with any hard objects that could damage the surface of the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

• Do not spray the sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Doing so may cause the sensors to fail to operate normally.

D EF OS R

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

i

Information

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to “Windshield

Defrosting and Defogging” in this chapter.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants related to a Rear

Parking Assist System. Always drive safely and cautiously.

Rear window defroster

■ Manual climate control system

■

Automatic climate control system

OHCR046301

OYC046301

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window, while engine is running.

3-94

• To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

• To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

Outside mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the outside mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

i

Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

• The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position.

i

Information

The rear window defroster may turn off in the below conditions.

- Engine temperature is less than 25

° C and the vehicle speed is from 1 ~

10 km/h with the gear position in

“D” or “R”

If the vehicle stops or the vehicle speed is over 10 km/h, the glass heater and/or the rear window defroster turns on again.

3

3-95


M AN AL LIIM TE ON RO L S YS TE F E QU PE

■ Type A

■

Type B

1. Temperature control knob

2. Mode selection knob

3. Fan speed control knob

4. Air intake control button

5. Rear window defroster button

6. A/C (Air conditioning) button*

* : if equipped

OHCR046303/OHCI047303

3-96

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling :

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Mode selection

OHCR046365/OYC046322

The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.

3-97

3


Face-Level (B, D)

Floor/Defrost-Level

(A, C, D, E)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E) Defrost-Level (A, D)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

OHCR046326

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

3-98

Temperature control Air intake control

Outside (fresh) air position

■ Type A

■

Type B

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

3

OYC046303

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system.

To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right position for warm and hot air or left position for cooler air.

OHCR046304

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

i

Information

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) will cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

3-99


WARNING

• Continuous operation of the climate control system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

• Continuous operation of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

Fan speed control Air conditioning (A/C)

(if equipped)

OHCR046305

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system.

To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the “0” position turns off the fan.

OHCR046306

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

3-100

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.




Heating





5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.


3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

i

Information

Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or

R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of production. You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the hood.

3

3-101


NOTICE

• The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.

• The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.

• The air conditioning evaporator

(cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

i

Information

• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

3-102

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristics.

System maintenance

Climate control air filter

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower

Climate control air filter

Evaporator core

Heater core

1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system.

If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

WARNING

We recommend that the air conditioning system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Improper service may cause serious injury to the person performing the service.

3-103

3


Air Conditioning refrigerant label (if equipped)

■

Example

OYC046308

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the hood.

3-104

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

A UT MA

■ Type A

C C LIIM TE ON RO L S YS EM EQ UIIP D))

■

Type B

1. Temperature control knob

2. Fan speed control knob

2. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. Air intake control button

5. OFF button

6. Front windshield defrost button

7. Rear window defrost button

8. Mode selection button

9. Air conditioning button

10. Climate control information screen

3

OHCR046307/OHCI047307

3-105


Automatic heating and air conditioning

OYC046308

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically according to the temperature setting.

OYC046309

2. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

i

Information

• To turn the automatic operation off, select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defrost button

(Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

• For your convenience, use the

AUTO button and set the temperature to 23°C (73°F).

3-106

OHCI047677R i

Information

Never place anything near the sensor to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. When pressing any button except the AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1.Start the engine.

2.Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3.Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4.Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5.Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6.If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

3

3-107


Mode selection

OHCR046370/OHCR046366

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

3-108

The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

OYC046312

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

OHCR046326

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it left

(Rear : down) to the maximum position. To open the vent, rotate it right

(Rear : up) to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

3

3-109


Temperature control Air intake control

Outside (fresh) air position

■ Type A

■ Type B

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

OYC046309

Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

OYC046316

This is used to select the outside

(fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

i

Information

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

3-110

WARNING

• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

Fan speed control Air conditioning

OYC046317

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by controlling the fan speed control knob.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

OHCR046308

Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

3

3-111


OFF mode

OYC046310

Push the OFF button of the front to turn off the air climate control system.

However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

System operation

Ventilation





Heating





5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

3-112

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.


3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

i

Information

Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or

R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of production. You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the hood.

NOTICE

• The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.

• The air conditioning evaporator

(cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

i

Information

• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle.

Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• Use air conditioning to reduce humidity and moisture inside the vehicle on rainy or humid days.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

3-113

3


• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

System maintenance

Climate control air filter

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower


Evaporator core

Heater core

1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system.

If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

3-114

Air Conditioning refrigerant label (if equipped)

■

Example

OYC046308

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the hood.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

3-115

3


WIIN DS HIIE LD EF OS TIIN G A D D OG GIIN

WARNING

Windshield heating

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.

Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to lower speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

OHCI047309MX

1. Select any fan speed except “0” position.

2. Select desired temperature.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically. Additionally, the air conditioning (if equipped) will automatically operate if the mode is selected to the position.

If the air conditioning and outside

(fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

3-116

To defrost outside windshield Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windshield

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

To defrost outside windshield

3

OHCI047311MX

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning (if equipped) will be selected automatically.

OYC046320

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed will be selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button or knob manually.

OYC046321

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.

2. Set temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.


4. The air-conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

3-117


Defogging logic (if equipped)

To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return the defogging logic, do the following.

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Turn to the defroster button ( ).

3. In 10 seconds, press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake button blinks 3 times. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.


3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The climate control information screen will blink 3 times. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

C LIIM TE ON RO

A DD TIIO NA L F AT UR

Cluster ionizer (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the clean air function turns on automatically.

Also, the clean air function turns off automatically, when the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

3-118

S TO AG E C OM RT ME T

WARNING

Never store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

Center console storage

(if equipped)

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage compartment covers closed securely while driving. Items inside your vehicle are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items may fly out of the compartment and may cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

NOTICE

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartments.

To open :

Press the button (1).

Glove box

OYC046411

OHCR046328

To open:

Pull the lever (1).

WARNING

ALWAYS close the glove box door after use.

An open glove box door can cause serious injury to the passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing a seat belt.

3

3-119


Sunglass holder (if equipped)

OHCR046358

To open:

Press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.

To close:

Push back into position.

Make sure the sunglass holder is closed while driving.

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

Multi box

OHCR046376

To keep the objects, use the multi boxes. Makes sure that the objects in multi boxes don’t distract the driver.

3-120

IIN TE R F EA RE

Ashtray (if equipped) Cup holder

OPDE046419

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean the ashtray:

The plastic receptacle should be removed by lifting the plastic ashtray receptacle upward after turning the cover counterclockwise and pulling it out.

WARNING

Ashtray use

Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

OYC046415

Cups or small beverages cups may be placed in the cup holders.

OHCI037044

Rear (if equipped)

To use the center cup holder, pull down the armrest.

3-121

3


WARNING

• Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is in use to prevent spilling your drink. If hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

• Do not place uncovered or unsecured cups, bottles, cans, etc., in the cup holder containing hot liquid while the vehicle is in motion. Injuries may result in the event of sudden stop or collision.

• Only use soft cups in the cup holders. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Sunvisor

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a hot vehicle. It may explode.

NOTICE

• Keep your drinks sealed while driving to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.

• When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.

OHCR046330

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).

Use the ticket holder (4) to hold tickets.

3-122

i

Information

Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use.

WARNING

For your safety, do not block your view when using the sunvisor.

Power outlet

NOTICE

Do not put several tickets in the ticket holder at one time. This could cause damage to the ticket holder.

OHCI047377

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 180

W(Watt) with the engine running.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the Power

Outlets :

• Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 180

W(Watt) in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

(Continued)

WARNING

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not place your fingers or foreign objects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet or touch the power outlet with a wet hand.

3

3-123


(Continued)

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat and the fuse may open.

• Plug in battery equipped electrical/electronic devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery may flow into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and cause system malfunction.

USB Charger (if equipped)

■ Front

■ Rear

OHCI047686

A charging status/charging completion message will be displayed on the screen of your device.

Your device may get warm during the re-charging process. This does not indicate any malfunction with the charging system.

A device that requires a specific recharging method may not properly re-charge with this USB charger. If this is the case, use the specified charger for your device.

This USB charging terminal will not allow you to play your media on the

AVN unit. To connect your media to the AVN unit, use the USB port in the multi box and follow steps in Chapter

4 - Multimedia.

OHCI047694R

The USB charger is located inside the console box between the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat.

Insert the USB charger into the USB port, and re-charge a smart phone or a tablet PC.

3-124

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat.

• If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.

• Do not insert foreign objects into the socket of the cigarette lighter. It may damage the cigarette lighter.

OHCR046378

To use the cigarette lighter, the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position.

Push the cigarette lighter all the way into its socket. When the element is heated, the lighter will pop out to the

“ready” position.

We recommend that you use parts for replacement from an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter should be used in the cigarette lighter socket. The use of plug-in accessories (shavers, hand-held vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure.

Clock

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driving.You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.

For more details, please refer to the Chapter 4.

3

3-125


Clothes hanger (if equipped) Floor mat anchor(s)

(if equipped)

OHCR046331

Use Coat hook to hang items.

These hangers are not designed to hold large or heavy items.

OHCR046332

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors to attach the front floor mats to the vehicle. The anchors on the front floor carpet keep the floor mats from sliding forward.

WARNING

Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothe pockets. In an accident or when the curtain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

3-126

WARNING

The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation,

HYUNDAI recommends that the

HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Multimedia System

Multimedia system .................................................4-2

AUX, USB and iPod ® port ...............................................4-2

Antenna ...............................................................................4-2

Steering wheel audio control .........................................4-3

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology hands-free ...........4-4

How vehicle radio works .................................................4-5

Audio (Without Touch Screen) ............................4-8

Feature of Your Audio .....................................................4-9

Radio...................................................................................4-14

Media..................................................................................4-15

Phone .................................................................................4-23

Setup ..................................................................................4-31

Audio (With Touch Screen) ................................4-34

Feature of Your Audio ...................................................4-35

Radio...................................................................................4-40

Media..................................................................................4-42

Phone .................................................................................4-53

Setup ..................................................................................4-62

Declaration of Conformity..................................4-64

CE for EU ..........................................................................4-64

FCC Warning .....................................................................4-65

NCC for Taiwan ................................................................4-66

4

Multimedia System

M UL TIIM ED A S YS M

i Information

• If you install an aftermarket HID headlamp, your vehicle’s audio and electronic device may malfunction.

• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.

AUX, USB and iPod

®

port Antenna

OHCR046379

You can use an AUX port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB or an iPod ® .

OHCR046368

The roof antenna receives both AM and FM broadcast signals. Rotate the roof Antenna Pole in a counterclockwise direction to remove it.

Rotate it in a clockwise direction to reinstall it.

i Information

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

❈ iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-2

NOTICE

• Remove the antenna by rotating it in a counter-clockwise direction, before entering a place with a low floor height. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

• Securely install the antenna in the upright position. This is to guarantee proper signal reception.

• Do not load the luggage near the antenna. This is to guarantee proper signal reception.

Steering wheel audio control

(if equipped)


OHCR056008

The steering wheel audio control switches are installed for your convenience.

NOTICE

Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)

• Move the VOLUME toggle switch up to increase volume.

• Move the VOLUME toggle switch down to decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch is moved up or down and held for 0.8

second or more, it will function in the following modes.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select switch. It will SEEK until you release the switch.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/REW switch.

4

4-3

Multimedia System

If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch is moved up or down, it will function in the following modes.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION UP/DOWN switch.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/

DOWN switch.

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology hands-free (if equipped)

(1) Call / Answer button

(2) Call end button

(3) Microphone

• Audio : For detailed information, refer to “AUDIO” in this chapter.

• AV : Detailed information for the

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology hands-free is described in the manual supplied separately.

MODE ( ) (3)

Press mode button to select Various

Available Media sources like Radio,

USB, AUX, My Music, BT audio

OHCI047338R

MUTE ( ) (4)

• Press the button to mute the sound.

• Press the button again to activate the sound.

i Information

Detailed information for audio control buttons are described in the following pages in this chapter.

OHCI057009R

You can use the phone wirelessly by using the Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology.

4-4

How vehicle radio works

FM reception

OJF045308L

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM (MW, LW) reception

OJF045309L

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.

4

4-5

Multimedia System

FM radio station

OJF045310L

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble :

JBM004

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

OJF045311L

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

4-6

Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

NOTICE

When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

iPod

® iPod ® is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc.

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology

The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by HYUNDAI is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

A Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology enabled cell phone is required to use

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology.

WARNING

Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.

4-7

4

Multimedia System

A UD Wiitth ou uc h S ee n))

■ Type A

■ Type B

(With Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology)

H6N3H0000EG/H6N3H0001EG

4-8

Feature of Your Audio

Head Unit

■ Type A

■

Type B

❈ The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1)

• Plays Radio(FM/AM) mode.

• Each time the button is pressed, the radio mode popup will be displayed or closed.

• The radio mode popup will not be displayed when [SETUP/CLOCK] button [Display] [Mode popup] is turned [Off].

(2)

RADIO

MEDIA

• Plays Media(USB(iPod ® ), Bluetooth ®

(BT) Audio*, AUX) mode.

• Each time the button is pressed, the media mode popup will be displayed or closed.

• The media mode popup will not be displayed when [SETUP/CLOCK] button [Display] [Mode popup] is turned [Off].

* if equipped

(4) PHONE (Type B)

• Moves to Phone Screen.

• If Bluetooth ® is not connected, displays Bluetooth ® Pair/Connection screen.

(5) SEEK/TRACK

When pressed quickly

• Radio mode: Searches broadcast frequencies.

• Media mode: Changes the track, file or title. (except AUX)

When pressed and held (more than

1.0 seconds)

• Radio mode: Frequency is controlled by 1 step quickly. When the button is released after pressing and holding, searches broadcast frequencies.

• Media mode: Rewinds or fastforwards the song.

(except

Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio*, AUX)

* if equipped

(3) DISP (Type A)

• Turns off the screen.

• Each time the button is pressed, it sets the Screen Off ➟ On ➟ Off.

(6) POWER/VOL knob

• Power knob: Turns power On/Off by pressing the knob.

• Volume knob: Sets volume by turning the knob left/right.

4-9

4

Multimedia System

■

Type A

■ Type B

(7) SETUP/CLOCK


• Moves to Setup screen.


1.0 seconds)

• Moves to the Time Settings.

(8) MENU

• Displays menus for the current mode.

(9) BACK

• Moves to previous screen.

(10) FOLDER

• USB mode: Searches folders.

(11) TUNE knob

• Radio mode: Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.

• Media mode: Searches songs(files) by turning the knob left/right.

(12) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)


• Radio mode: Receives saved frequencies(channels).

• Media mode(USB)

[1 RPT] button: Repeat/Repeat

Folder

[2 SHFL] button: Shuffle Folder/

Shuffle

• Media mode(iPod ® )

[1 RPT] button: Repeat

[2 SHFL] button: Shuffle

• In case of Menu popup, the number menu is selected.


1.0 seconds)

• Radio mode: Saves frequencies

(channels).

4-10

Steering wheel remote control

(Bluetooth ® equipped model)

❈

The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1) MUTE

• Mutes the audio.

• Mutes the microphone during a call. (Bluetooth ® equipped model)

(2) MODE

• Each time this is pressed, the mode is changed sequentially.

• If the media is not connected, the corresponding modes will be disabled.

• Press and hold to turn the Audio system on/off.

• When power is off, press button to turn power back on.

(4) SEEK/TRACK

• When pressed quickly

- Radio mode: Searches broadcast frequencies saved to Presets.

- Media mode: Changes track, file or title. (except AUX)

• When pressed and held (more than 1.0 seconds)

- Radio mode: Frequency is controlled by 1 step quickly. When the button is released after pressing and holding, searches broadcast frequencies.

- Media mode: Rewinds or fast-forwards the song.

(except

Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio*, AUX)

* if equipped

(3) VOLUME

• Adjust the volume.

(5) CALL (if equipped)

• When pressed quickly

- If not in Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call.

First press: Automatically display the most recently Dialed Call number.

Second press: The most recently

Dialed Call number is dialed.

4

4-11

Multimedia System

- Press in the incoming call screen, answers the call.

- Press in Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode to switch to the waiting call.

• When pressed and held (more than 1.0 seconds)

- If not in Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call, the most recently Dialed Call number is dialed.

- When pressed in Bluetooth ®

Handsfree mode to switch the call to your cell phone.

- When pressed in cell phone mode to switch to Bluetooth ®

Handsfree mode.

- If Bluetooth ® is not connected, displays Bluetooth ® Pair/Connection screen.

(6) END (if equipped)

• When pressed during a call, ends the phone call.

• When pressed in the incoming call screen, rejects the call.

WARNING

• Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.

• Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

• Exercise caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such conditions could lead to accidents (fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehicle engine turned on. Prolonged use with the ignition turned on only could result in battery discharge.

4-12

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

NOTICE

• Operating the device while driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external surroundings. First park the vehicle before operating the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle.

Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on.

A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)

• Turn on the car engine before using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time only with the ignition turned on as such operations may lead to battery discharge.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD.

• When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth.

Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents

(alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.).

As such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration.

• Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.

• In this case of product malfunction, please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.

• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration.

4-13

4

Multimedia System

Radio

Radio Mode

Change Mode: [RADIO] button

• Plays Radio(FM/AM) mode. Each time the button is pressed, the radio mode popup will be displayed or closed.

• The radio mode popup will not be displayed when [SETUP/CLOCK] button [Display] [Mode popup] is turned [Off].

Search Frequency: [SEEK/TRACK] button

Searches the previous/next broadcast frequencies.

• Shortly pressing the button:

Searches broadcast frequencies.

• Frequency is controlled by 1 step quickly. When the button is released after pressing and holding, searches broadcast frequencies.

Change Frequency: TUNE knob

Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right. You can seek available frequencies manually.

FM/AM Mode

Saved Frequency: [1] ~ [6] (Preset) buttons

• Shortly pressing the button: Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding button.

• Pressing and holding the button

(more than 1.0 seconds): Saves the currently playing broadcast to the selected button and sound a

BEEP.

Displays Menu Popup when pressing the [MENU] button.

Traffic announcement (for RDS model)

TA(Traffic announcement) feature

On/Off.

FM/AM (with RDS)

Presets (for RDS model)

Displays saved presets.

Auto Store

• Saves broadcasts with superior reception to [1] ~ [6] (Preset) buttons.

• If no frequencies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.

4-14

Scan

The broadcast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. After scanning all frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast frequency.

Media

i Information Using MP3

Supported audio formats

Sound Settings

Moves to Sound Settings.

NOTICE

File formats that do not comply with the above formats may not be properly recognized or play without properly displaying file names or other information.

Support for Compressed Files

1. Supported Bitrates (Kbps)

4

2. Sampling Frequencies (Hz)

4-15

Multimedia System

• For MP3/WMA compression files, differences in sound quality will occur depending on the bitrate.

(Higher sound quality can be experienced with higher bitrates.)

• This device only recognizes files with MP3/WMA extensions. Other file extensions may not be properly recognized.

3. Maximum number of recognized folders and files

• Folder: 1,000 folders for USB

• File: 5,000 files for USB

• There are no limitations to the number of recognized folder levels.

4. Text Display (Based on Unicode)

• Filenames: Maximum 40 English characters

• Foldernames: Maximum 40 English characters

NOTICE

Using the scroll feature allows you to see the entire name of files with names that are too long to be displayed at once.

Language Support (Unicode Support)

• Korean: 2,604 characters

• English: 94 characters

• Common Chinese characters: 4,888 characters

• Special symbols: 986 characters

NOTICE

Japanese/Simplified Chinese characters are not supported.

i Information

- Using the USB Device

• Connect the USB device after turning on the engine. The USB device may become damaged if it is already connected when the ignition is turned on. The USB device may not operate properly if the car ignition is turned on or off with the USB device connected.

• Be careful for static electricity when connecting/disconnecting USB devices.

• Encoded MP3 Players will not be recognized when connected as an external device.

• When connecting an external USB device, the vehicle's audio system may not recognize the USB depending on what firmware is used by USB device or what files are on the USB.

• Only products formatted with byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be recognized.

• This device recognizes USB devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file formats. This device does not recognize files in NTFS file format.

(Continued)

4-16

(Continued)

• Some USB devices may not be supported due to compatibility issues.

• Avoid contact between the USB connector and bodily parts or foreign objects.

• Repeated connecting/disconnecting of USB devices within short periods of time may result in product malfunction.

• A strange noise may occur when disconnecting the USB.

• Make sure to connect/disconnect external USB devices with the audio power turned off.

• The amount of time required to recognize the USB device may differ depending on the type, size or file formats stored on the USB. Such differences in time are not indications of malfunctions.

• The vehicle audio system only supports USB devices designed to play music files.

• USB images and videos are not supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use the USB I/F to charge batteries or USB accessories that generate heat. Doing so may lead to worsened performance or damage to the audio system.

• The audio system may not recognize the USB device if separately purchased USB hubs and extension cables are being used. Connect the

USB device directly with the USB port of the vehicle.

• When using mass storage USB devices with separate logical drives, only files saved to the root drive can be played.

• Files may not properly operate if application programs are installed on the USBs.

• The audio system may not operate normally if MP3 Players, cellular phones, digital cameras, or other electronic devices (USB devices not recognized as portable disk drives) are connected with the audio system.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Charging through the USB may not work for some mobile devices.

• The device may not support normal operation when using an atypical

USB memory device (miniature, keychain, etc.). For best results, use a typical USB device that has a metal case.

• The device may not support normal operation when using formats such as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.

• The device will not support files locked by DRM (Digital Rights

Management.).

• USB memory sticks used by connecting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF

Type) may not be properly recognized.

• The device may not operate properly when using USB HDDs or USBs subject to connection failures caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. istick type)

(Continued)

4

4-17

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• Avoid use of USB memory products that can also be used as key chains or mobile phone accessories. Use of such products may cause damage to the

USB jack.

• Connecting an MP3 device or phone through various channels, such as

AUX/BT or Audio/USB mode may result in pop noises or abnormal operation.

• Use USB 2.0 devices for better compatibility. Maximum device size supported is 32 GB.

i Information Using an iPod ®

• iPod ® is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc.

• In order to use the iPod ® with your vehicle’s audio system, you must use a dedicated iPod ® cable. (the cable that is supplied when purchasing iPod ® /iPhone ® products)

• If the iPod ® is connected to the vehicle while it is playing, a high pitch sound could occur for approximately 1-2 seconds immediately after connecting. If possible, connect the iPod ® to the vehicle with the iPod ® stopped/paused.

• When the vehicle ignition is set to

ACC or ON, connecting the iPod ® through the iPod ® cable will charge the iPod ® through the car audio system.

• When connecting with the iPod ® cable, make sure to fully insert the jack to prevent communication interference.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When the EQ features of an external device, such as the iPod ® , and the audio system are both active, EQ effects could overlap and cause sound deterioration and distortion.

Whenever possible, turn off the EQ feature within the external device when it is connected to the audio system.

• Noise may occur when an iPod ® or

AUX device is connected. When such devices are not being used, disconnect the device for storage.

• When the iPod ® or AUX device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may result in noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use.

• Skipping or improper operation may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod ® /iPhone ® device.

(Continued)

4-18

(Continued)

• If your iPhone ® is connected to both the Bluetooth ® and USB, the sound may not be properly played. In your iPhone ® , select the Dock connector or Bluetooth ® to change the sound output (source).

• iPod ® mode cannot be operated when the iPod ® cannot be recognized due to the playing of versions that do not support communication protocols, cases of iPod ® abnormalities and defects.

• For fifth generation iPod ® Nano devices, the iPod ® may not be recognized when the battery level is low.

Please charge the iPod ® for use.

• The search/play orders shown within the iPod ® device may differ from the orders shown within the audio system.

• If the iPod ® malfunctions due to an iPod ® device defect, reset the iPod ® and try again. (To learn more, refer to your iPod ® manual)

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some iPod ® s may not sync with the

System depending on the version. If the Media is removed before the

Media is recognized, then the system may not properly restore the previously operated mode. (iPad ® charging is not supported.)

• Use an iPod ® cable shorter than 1 meter in length such as the one originally supplied with a new iPod ® , longer cables may lead to the audio system not recognizing the iPod ® .

i Information

- Using Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio

(if epuipped)

• Bluetooth ® Audio Mode can be used only when a Bluetooth ® phone has been connected.

• Bluetooth ® Audio Mode will not be available when connecting mobile phones that do not support this feature.

• If a Bluetooth ® Phone is being used to play music and receives an incoming or outgoing phone call, then the music will stop.

• Moving the Track up/down while playing Bluetooth ® audio mode may result in pop noises with some mobile phones.

• Bluetooth ® streaming audio may not be supported in some mobile phones.

• When returning to Bluetooth ®

Audio mode after ending a call, the mode may not automatically restart in some mobile phones.

• Receiving an incoming call or making an outgoing call while playing

Bluetooth ® Audio may result in audio interference.

4-19

4

Multimedia System

Media Mode

Change Mode: [MEDIA] button

• Each time the button is pressed, the media mode popup will be displayed or closed.

You can select a menu in the mode popup by using the [1] ~ [6] (Preset) buttons or TUNE knob.

• The media mode popup will not be displayed when [SETUP/CLOCK] button [Display] [Mode popup] is turned [Off].

• If media device(USB, AUX) is connected, then it will automatically operate. Once it is disconnected, the previous mode will be restored.

• The Audio/Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio*/

AUX volume can also be controlled.

* if equipped

Repeat: [1 RPT] button

Repeats the current song or repeats all songs within the current folder.

• iPod ® mode: Repeat Song ➟

Repeat Off

• USB mode: Repeat Song

➟

Repeat Folder

➟

Off

Shuffle: [2 SHFL] button

Plays all songs within the current folder(category) or play all songs in random order.

• iPod ® mode: Shuffle All ➟ Shuffle

Off

• USB mode: Shuffle Folder

➟

Shuffle All

➟

Off

Change Song/File: [SEEK/TRACK] button

[ ∨∨ SEEK/TRACK] button

• Shortly pressing the button: Plays the current song from the beginning.

• If the [

∨∨

SEEK/TRACK] button is pressed again within 2 seconds, the previous song is played.


(more than 1.0 seconds): Rewinds the song.

[SEEK/TRACK

∧∧

] button

• Shortly pressing the button: Plays the next song.


(more than 1.0 seconds): Fast-forwards the song.

i Information

• AUX and Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio* don’t support Rewind/Fast-forward feature.

• Changing the previous/next song may not be supported in some

Bluetooth ® devices.

* if equipped

4-20

Search Song: TUNE knob

• Turning TUNE knob: Searches for songs(files).

• Pressing TUNE knob: Plays selected song(file).

i Information

• Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio* and AUX don’t support playlist feature.

• In iPod ® Mode, song (file) lists are not supported if music is played using the Music application after connecting the iPod ® .

• While Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio* is playing, pressing the TUNE knob plays and pauses the current song.

* if equipped

USB Shuffle

Randomly plays all songs. Press it again to turn off.

Information

Displays information of the current song.


Sound Settings


List

Moves to the list screen.

Repeat

Repeats the current song. Press it again to turn off.

Search Folder: [FOLDER] button

• Searches the previous/next folder.

(USB) i Information

If a folder is selected by pressing the

TUNE knob, the first file within the selected folder will be played.

Repeat Folder

Repeats songs within the current folder. Press it again to turn off.

Shuffle Folder

Randomly plays songs within the current folder. Press it again to turn off.

4

4-21

Multimedia System iPod ® Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio

(if equipped)



List

Moves to the list screen.

Sound Settings


Repeat

Repeats the current song. Press it again to turn off.

i Information

• Audio may not automatically start playing in some Bluetooth ® devices.

If the music in the Bluetooth ® device is not played after changing to audio streaming mode, press the TUNE knob. Check if the music is playing in the Bluetooth ® device after changing to audio streaming mode.

• Audio streaming may not be supported for some Bluetooth ® devices.

• If Bluetooth ® device is disconnected,

Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio is ended.

• Bluetooth ® connection is required to use Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio. Refer to the Bluetooth ® manual for more information.

Shuffle

Plays all songs within the currently playing category in random order.

Press it again to turn off.

Information

Displays information of the current song.

Sound Settings


4-22

AUX


Sound Settings


i Information

• AUX mode can be used only when an external audio player has been connected.

• If only a cable is connected to the

AUX without an external device, the mode will be changed to AUX, but noise may occur. When an external device is not being used, remove the connector jack.

• When the external device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may output noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use.

Phone (if equipped)

i Information

- Using Bluetooth ® (BT) Phone

What is Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology?

• Bluetooth ® refers to a short-distance wireless networking technology which uses a 2.45GHz frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance.

• Supported within PCs, external devices, Bluetooth ® phones, PDAs, various electronic devices, and automotive environments, Bluetooth ® to be transmitted at high speeds without having to use a connector cable.

• Bluetooth ® Handsfree refers to a device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with Bluetooth ® devices through the Multimedia system.

• The Bluetooth ® Handsfree feature may not be supported in some

Bluetooth ® devices.

4

4-23

Multimedia System

WARNING

• Focus on the road while driving.

The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of the vehicle. Drivers should not use any hand held devices or other equipment or vehicle systems that distract the driver during vehicle operation.

• Do not stare at the multimedia screen for long periods of time while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time can lead to traffic accidents and can result in personal injuries.

• Pairing Bluetooth ® devices and use of other Bluetooth ® features are not supported when the vehicle is in motion.

For safety, please first park your vehicle.

NOTICE

• Bluetooth ® is a feature that enables drivers to make handsfree calls. Connecting the head unit with a Bluetooth ® phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phonebook. Before using Bluetooth ® , carefully read the contents of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and be the cause of accidents. Do not operate the device excessively while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

NOTICE

• Before connecting the head unit with the Bluetooth ® device, check to see that the mobile device supports Bluetooth ® features.

• Even if the mobile device supports

Bluetooth ® , the device will not be found during device searches if the device has been set to hidden state or the Bluetooth ® power is turned off. Disable the hidden state or turn on the

Bluetooth ® power prior to searching/connecting with the head unit.

• If a Bluetooth ® device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a

Bluetooth ® communication error, corresponding Bluetooth ® devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

(Continued)

4-24

(Continued)

• If you do not want automatic connection with your Bluetooth ® device, turn the Bluetooth ® feature off in the Bluetooth ® device.

• Only one Bluetooth ® device can be connected at a time.

• Bluetooth ® connection may become intermittently disconnected in some Bluetooth ® devices. Follow these steps to try again.

1. Turn the Bluetooth ® function within the Bluetooth ® device

OFF/ON and try again.

2. Turn the Bluetooth ® device power OFF/ON and try again.

3. Completely remove the

Bluetooth ® device battery, reboot, and then again.

4. Reboot the Multimedia System and try again.

5. Delete all paired devices from both of Bluetooth ® device and

Head Unit sides and then try again.

NOTICE

• If the Bluetooth ® device is not connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. After connecting your Bluetooth ® device to your car, use the Bluetooth ® features.

• You will not be able to use the handsfree feature when your phone is outside of the cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a mountainous area, etc.).

• If the cellular phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

• Do not place the Bluetooth ® device near or inside metallic objects, otherwise communications with Bluetooth ® system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.


(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some Bluetooth ® devices may cause interference noise or malfunction to audio system. In this case, store the device in a different location may resolve the condition.

• While a device is connected through Bluetooth ® , your device may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth ® related operations.

• The handsfree call volume and quality may differ depending on the Bluetooth ® device.

• If Connection Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC

ON), the Bluetooth ® device will be automatically connected.

Even if you are outside, the

Bluetooth ® device will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle.

If you do not want to automatically connect your Bluetooth ® device, turn off the Bluetooth ® feature in your Bluetooth ® device.

(Continued)

4-25

4

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• In some Bluetooth ® devices, starting the ignition while talking through Bluetooth ® enabled handsfree call will result in the call becoming disconnected due to car handsfree call transfer. If you use your phone outside the vehicle, turn off the Bluetooth ® feature in your phone.

Bluetooth ® Connection

Before you can use the Bluetooth ® feature, you must first pair/connect your Bluetooth ® device to your car.

Pairing a New Device

Press the [PHONE] button in the head unit or [CALL] button in the steering wheel remote control.

Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button

Select [Phone] Select [Add New

Device].

In your Bluetooth ® device,

1. Pair your car after your Bluetooth ® device detects the Bluetooth ® device.

2. Enter the passkey(0000) or accept the authorization popup.

3. Connect Bluetooth ® .

i Information

• Up to 5 Bluetooth ® devices can be paired.

• The default passkey is 0000.

• During a Bluetooth ® device connection, another device cannot be paired.

• The Vehicle Name above is an example. Check the actual information on the product.

• Pairing and connecting a

Bluetooth ® enabled Bluetooth ® device will work only when the

Bluetooth ® option within your

Bluetooth ® device has been turned on. (Methods of turning on the

Bluetooth ® enabled feature may differ depending on the Bluetooth ® device.)

• After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent to the

Bluetooth ® device. Some Bluetooth ® devices may require confirmation upon receiving a download request.

Ensure your Bluetooth ® device accepts the connection. Refer to your phone’s user manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connections.

4-26

Connecting Bluetooth ® Devices

Press the [PHONE] button in the head unit or [CALL] button in the steering wheel remote control

Select the name of the device to connect Connect Bluetooth ® .

Connects the Bluetooth ® devices that you add.

i Information


• Bluetooth ® features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth ® device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call: Switch to Private, Switch to call waiting,

MIC on/off

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Contacts

- Bluetooth ® device Auto Connection

- Bluetooth ® Audio Streaming

Bluetooth ® Phone

Bluetooth ® Phone

Press the [PHONE] button.

Displays Phone Menu screen. The connected device name is displayed in the top of the display.

•

• : Call signal strength indicator.

: Battery level of the Bluetooth ® devices connected.

4

4-27

Multimedia System

Favorites

Press the [PHONE] button Select

[Favorites].

Lists the phone numbers saved as

Favorites. Select from the list to dial the number.


• Add New Favorites: Adds a phone number to Favorites.

• Delete Items: Deletes numbers that you select from Favorites.

• Delete All: Deletes all of the numbers from Favorites.

i Information

• Up to 20 favorites can be saved in favorites of each device.

• Downloading favorites in your

Bluetooth ® device does not be supported.

• To save favorite, contacts should be downloaded.

• Contact saved in favorites will not be automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone.

To update Favorites, delete the favorite and create a new favorite.

Call History


[Call History].

Displays all of your call history. Select from the list to dial the number.


• Download: Downloads the call history information from your

Bluetooth ® device.

• All Calls: Lists the all call history.

• Dialed Calls: Lists the calls that you made.

• Received Calls: Lists the calls that you have received.

• Missed Calls: Lists the calls you missed.

4-28

i Information

• Call history may not be saved in the call history list in some Bluetooth ® devices.

• Calls from restricted ID’s are not saved in the call history list.

• Up to 50 calls can be added in each

Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Missed

Calls list.

• The durations of each dialed/received call are not displayed in your car’s

Call History list.

• While the call history download is in progress, the status bar displays an icon ( ).

• If the call history download is turned off on the Bluetooth ® device, the call history download will fail.

• Some devices require a device authentication for downloading your call history. If download fails, check if the Bluetooth ® settings or display status are normal.

Contacts


[Contacts].

Displays the list of Contacts. Select from the list to dial the number.

Requesting Download

Some devices require a device authentication for downloading your call history and contacts.

If download fails, check the

Bluetooth ® device settings or the screen state.


• Download: Downloads contacts from your Bluetooth ® device.

i Information

• Only supported contacts format can be downloaded and displayed from the Bluetooth device, contacts from some applications will not be included.

• Up to 2000 phone numbers can be downloaded from a single, paired

Bluetooth ® device.

• You cannot edit or delete downloaded phone numbers from your car.

(Continued)

4

4-29

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• Contacts can be viewed only when the Bluetooth ® device is connected.

• Even if the Bluetooth ® device is disconnected, the downloaded data will remain. (Note that deleting a paired device will also delete all downloaded

Contacts and Call History data)

• Downloaded phone numbers may be lost depending on the condition of the head unit. Keep your important data in a safe place.

• The status bar displays a ( ) while downloading contacts.

• The download will not be available if the contacts download function is turned off on your Bluetooth ® device.

• Phone contact names should be saved in English or they may not be displayed correctly.

• The time of contacts/call history download may differ depending on the Bluetooth ® devices.

• Some devices require a device authentication for downloading your contacts. If download fails, check your phone screen and confirm the download if necessary.

4-30

Accept/Reject Call

If there is an incoming call, a popup message will appear.

Using the Menu During a Phone Call

When making a call, you can use the following menu items.

• To answer the incoming call, select

[Accept] on the screen or press the

[CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control.

• To reject the call, select [Reject] on the screen or press the [END] button on the steering wheel remote control.

i Information

In some Bluetooth ® devices, the caller’s number may not be displayed, and the Reject feature may not be supported.

(1) Private: Switches a voice call from the car Hands-free to the


(2) End: Ends a call.


• Outgoing Volume: Displays the Mic

Volume settings. You can adjust the in-call volume that the other party hears (level 1 - 5).

i Information

• Up to 2000 phone numbers can be downloaded from a single, paired


• If the caller’s number is listed in

Contacts, the caller’s name will be displayed. Otherwise, only the number will be displayed. In some

Bluetooth ® devices, the phone number may not be displayed.

• In some Bluetooth ® devices, the Use

Private feature may not be supported.

• In some Bluetooth ® devices, the

Switch feature may not be supported.

• The phone number may not be properly displayed in some

Bluetooth ® devices.

• During a phone call on a Bluetooth ®

Handsfree, you cannot access other modes, such as Radio and Setup.

• Depending on handset types, the incall volume the other party hears may differ. If the other party hears your voice too low or too loud, adjust the mic volume.

Phone settings


[Phone settings].

- For more details, refer to Setup

➟

Bluetooth page.

Setup

Display


Select [Display].

• Media Display: When playing an

MP3 file, select the desired display info from [Folder/File] or

[Artist/Title/Album].

• Mode Popup: During [On] state, press the [RADIO] or [MEDIA] button to display the mode change popup.

• Text Scroll: If text is too long to display, the text is scrolled from right to left.

- Title name on USB/iPod ® /

Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio* Screen.

- Focused File/Folder name on play list.

- Focused Contacts name on Call

History/Contacts/Favorites list.*

- Focused Device name on Paired

Devices, Delete Devices,

Connection Priority Settings list.*

* if equipped

4

4-31

Multimedia System

Sound


Select [Sound].

• Position: Selects the sound position.

• Tone: Selects the sound tone.

• Speed Dependent Volume:

Controls the volume level automatically according to the speed of the vehicle.


Add New Device


Select [Phone] Select [Add New

Device].

• The following steps are the same as those described in the section

[Pairing a New Device] on the previous page.

Date/Time


Select [Date/Time].

• Set Date: Adjusts the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the TUNE knob to move to the next settings.

• Time Format: Sets the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system.

• Display(Power OFF): Displays time/date on screen when the audio system turns power off.

• Set Time: Adjusts the number currently in focus to set the [hour], and press the TUNE knob to set the

[minute] and [AM/PM].

Connect/Disconnect Device


Select [Phone] Select [Paired devices].

• Displays the paired Bluetooth ® device list. From the paired device list, select the device you want to connect or disconnect.

i Information

• Displays the icons when Bluetooth ® device is connected.

: An icon appears when you make a Bluetooth ® Audio connection.

: An icon appears when you make a Bluetooth ® Handsfree connection.


• Bluetooth ® Handsfree and

Bluetooth ® Audio functions are supported. Handsfree and audio-supported devices, such as a Bluetooth ® smartphone or audio, will function normally.

• If the system is not stable due to a vehicle- Bluetooth ® device communication error, delete the paired device on each device and pair/connect the Bluetooth ® device again.

4-32

Delete Devices


Select [Phone] Select [Delete

Devices].

• Displays the paired Bluetooth ® device list.

• When selecting from the list, the device is deleted.

i Information

• When you delete a paired device, the

Call History and Contacts stored in the head unit are also deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

Connection Priority


Select [Phone] Select [Connection

Priority].

• Select the device to want to set the connection priority of paired devices.

• If “None” is chosen, the Bluetooth ® system will try to connect to the last connected device, then to all paired devices.

i Information

• When the engine is running, the selected Bluetooth ® device is automatically connected. If you fail to connect the selected device, the previously-connected device is automatically connected, and if it also fails, then it tries to connect all paired devices sequentially.

• Depending on auto connection priority, connection to a device may take time.

• If a Bluetooth ® device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a Bluetooth ® communication error, corresponding

Bluetooth ® devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

• Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth ® device will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want to automatically connect your Bluetooth ® device, turn off the Bluetooth ® feature in your


(Continued)

(Continued)

• In some Bluetooth ® devices, starting the ignition while talking through

Bluetooth ® enabled handsfree call will result in the call becoming disconnected due to car handsfree call transfer. If you use your phone outside the vehicle, turn off the

Bluetooth ® feature in your phone.

Language


Select [Language].

• Changes the display language.

Display Off


Select [Display Off].

• Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off.

In the Screen Off state, press any button to turn the Screen On again.

4

4-33

Multimedia System

A UD h T ou h S ee n))

■ Type C ■ Type D

(With Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology)

H6H4H0000EG/H6H4H0001EG

4-34

Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

■

Type C

❈ The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1)

• Tap the screen to select a button.

(2)

LCD screen

POWER/VOLUME knob

• Turn to adjust the volume.

• Press to turn the device on or off.

(4) MEDIA

• Select USB(iPod ® ), Bluetooth ® (BT)

Audio*, AUX or My Music.

• Display the media menu when two or more media are connected or when the [MEDIA] button is pressed in media mode.

* if equipped

(3) RADIO

• Start FM and AM Radio.

(5) SEEK/TRACK

• Search for next station in radio mode.

• Change the current song in media mode.

4

■

Type D

4-35

Multimedia System

■ Type C (6) DISP (Type C)

• Turn the display on or off.

(9) TUNE knob

• Turn to navigate through the stations/songs list.

• Press to select an item.

(7) PHONE (Type D)

• Start Bluetooth ® Phone mode.

(8) SETUP

• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth*, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.

* if equipped

(10) RESET

• Shutdown and restart the system.

■ Type D

4-36

Steering wheel remote control

(Bluetooth ® equipped model)

❈

The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1) MUTE

• Mutes the audio.

• Mutes the microphone during a call. (Bluetooth ® equipped model)

(2) MODE

• Press the button to change the mode in the following order: Radio

➟ Media.

• Press and hold the button to turn off.

(3) VOLUME

• Press to adjust the volume.

(4) UP/DOWN

• Press the button in radio mode to search Presets.

• Press and hold the button in radio mode to search frequencies.

• Press the button in media mode to change the current song. (except

AUX)

• Press and hold the button in media mode to quick search through songs.

(except Bluetooth ® (BT)

Audio and AUX)

(5) CALL (if equipped)

• Pressing the button

- If not in Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call.

First press: Display Dial Number screen.

Second press: Automatically display the most recently Dialed

Call number.

Third press: Dial the phone number entered.

- Press in the Incoming Call notification screen to accept the phone call.

- Press in Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode to switch to the waiting call.


(more than 1.0 seconds)

- If not in Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call, the most recently Dialed Call number is dialed.

- Press in Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode to transfer the call to your cell phone.

- Press in cell phone mode to switch to Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode.

4-37

4

Multimedia System

(6) END (if equipped)

• Press in Bluetooth ® Handsfree mode to end the phone call.

• Press in the incoming call screen to reject the call.

WARNING

• Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.

• Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

• Exercise caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such conditions could lead to accidents (fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehicle engine turned on.

Prolonged use with the ignition turned on only could result in battery discharge.

4-38

Multimedia System

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

NOTICE

• Operating the device while driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external surroundings. First park the vehicle before operating the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle.

Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on.

A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)

• Turn on the car engine before using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time only with the ignition turned on as such operations may lead to battery discharge.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD.

• When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth.

Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents

(alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.). As such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration

• Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.

• In this case of product malfunction, please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.


• Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration.

4-39

4

Multimedia System

Information on status icons

Icons showing audio status are shown in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Description

Mute Mute engaged

Battery

Handsfree +

Audio streaming connection

Handsfree connection

Bluetooth ® audio streaming

Remaining battery life of a connected Bluetooth ® device

Bluetooth ® Handsfree call and audio streaming available

Bluetooth ® call available

Handsfree

Bluetooth ® audio streaming available

Downloading contacts

Downloading call history

Downloading contacts through Bluetooth ® wireless communications

Downloading call history through Bluetooth ® wireless communications

Line busy Phone call in progress

Mute mic

Phone signal strength

Mic muted during a call (caller cannot hear your voice)

Display the phone signal strength for a cell phone connected by Bluetooth ®

4-40

Radio

FM/AM (without RDS)

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM.

(2) Presets

View all presets.

(3) List

View all available stations.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

Switching between FM, AM

• Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between

FM, AM.

• Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM.

Searching stations

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to search stations.

List

A list of all available stations in the vehicle’s current location is displayed. Select the desired station.

Favorite stations can be saved to

[Presets] by selecting [save].

Presets

Save up to 40 frequently used stations.

To listen to a preset, select the desired station list.

Press and hold the desired slot from

1 through 40. This saves the current station in the selected slot.

If the slot is empty, simply selecting saves the station to the slot

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

• Scan: All available stations are played for five seconds each.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

FM/AM (with RDS)

(1) Radio

Switch between FM and AM.

(2) List

View all available stations.

(3) Presets

View all presets

(4) Menu


Switching between FM, AM

• Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between

FM, AM.

• Select [Radio] on the screen to switch between FM and AM.

Searching stations

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to search stations.

List

A list of all available stations in the vehicle’s current location is displayed. Select the desired station.

Favorite stations can be saved to

[Presets] by selecting [+].

4

4-41

Multimedia System

Presets

Save up to 40 frequently used stations.

To listen to a preset, select the desired station list.

Press and hold the desired slot from

1 through 40. This saves the current station in the selected slot.

If the slot is empty, simply selecting saves the station to the slot.

Media

i Information - Using MP3

Supported audio formats

Menu


• Traffic Announcement (TA): Enable or disable Traffic Announcements.

• Scan: All available stations are played for five seconds each.


NOTICE

File formats other than the formats above may not be recognized or playable. Information such as filename may not be displayed.

Range of supported compressed file types

1. Bitrate range (Kbps)

4-42

2. Sampling frequency (Hz)

NOTICE

The scroll feature can be used to display file and folder names that are too long to display on the screen.

• The sound quality of MP3/WMA compressed and WAV files may vary depending on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate can have better sound quality.)

• The product only recognizes files with the MP3, WMA or WAV extension. Files without one of these extensions are not recognized.

3. Number of recognizable folders and files

• Folders: 2,000 for USB

• Files: 6,000 for USB

• No recognition limit for folder hierarchies

Languages supported (Unicode support)

• Korean: 2,604 characters

• English: 94 characters

• Common Chinese characters:

4,888 characters

• Special symbols: 986 characters

NOTICE

Japanese/Simplified Chinese characters are not supported.

4. Character display range (Unicode)

• Filenames: Up to 64 English characters (64 Korean characters)

• Foldernames: Up to 32 English characters (32 Korean characters) i Information

- Using the USB Devices

• Starting the vehicle while a USB device is connected can damage the device. Please disconnect USB devices before starting the vehicle.

• Starting the vehicle or stopping the engine while an external USB device is connected can result in failure of the external USB device to operate.

• Be cautious of static electricity when connecting/disconnecting external

USB devices.

• An encrypted MP3 player is not recognized when connected as an external device.

• External USB devices may not be recognized, depending on the state of the external USB device.

• Only products with byte/sectors formatted at 4 KB or lower are recognized.

• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32 format are recognized; NTFS and

ExFAT file systems are not recognized.

(Continued)

4-43

4

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• Some USB devices are not recognized due to compatibility issues.

• Do not touch the USB connections.

• Connecting and disconnecting USB devices rapidly over a short period of time can cause equipment failure.

• Abnormal sounds may be audible when the USB device is disconnected.

• Turn the audio off before connecting or disconnecting external USB devices.

• Recognition may take longer depending on the type, capacity or file format of the external USB device. This is not a product malfunction.

• Use of USB devices for purposes other than playing music files is prohibited.

• Image display and video playback are not supported.

• Use of USB accessories, including charge and heat though the USB I/F, can lead to reduced product performance or malfunctions. Do not use USB devices or accessories for these purposes.

(Continued)

4-44

(Continued)

• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and extension cables can result in the vehicle’s audio system failing to recognize your USB device. Connect the USB device directly to the multimedia port of your vehicle.

• When using high-capacity USB devices with logical drive divisions, only files saved on the highest level logical drive can be played.

If applications are loaded on a USB drive, file playback may fail.

• Some MP3 players, cell phones, digital cameras, etc. (USB devices that are not recognized as mobile storage) may not operate normally when connected.

• USB charging may not be supported by some mobile devices.

• Operation is guaranteed only for standard (Metal Cover Type) USB

Memory drives.

• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and memory stick devices is not guaranteed.

• DRM (Digital Rights Management) files cannot be played.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• SD-type USB memory, CF-type

USB memory, and other USB memory devices that require adapters for connection are not supported.

• Proper operation of USB HDDs or

USB drives with connectors that loosen due to vehicle vibrations is not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)

• USB products that are used as key chains or cell phone accessories may damage the USB jack and affect proper file playback. Please refrain from use. Use only products with plug connectors, as shown in the following illustration.

• When MP3 devices or cell phones are connected simultaneously through AUX, BT Audio and USB modes, a popping noise or malfunction may occur.

• Use USB 2.0 devices for better compatibility. Maximum device size supported is 32 GB.

Multimedia System

USB

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat play.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu


(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Select to skip to the desired location.

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [USB].

Connect a USB drive to the USB port to automatically play files on the USB drive.

Select and play the desired song.

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.

Search songs by turning TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.

Repeat play

•

•

•

•

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable

‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’,

‘Repeat folder’ or ‘Repeat category’ play.

Repeat all: All songs in the playlist are repeated.

Repeat current song: The currently playing song is repeated.

Repeat folder: All songs in the current folder are repeated.

Repeat category: Repeat all songs in the current category.

4

4-45

Multimedia System i Information

The repeat folder function is available only when songs are playing from the

[File] category under [List].

Shuffle play

•

•

•

Select [Shuffle] to enable or disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ or ‘Shuffle category’ play.

Shuffle: Songs are played in random order.

Shuffle folder: Songs within the current folder are played in random order.

Shuffle category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.

Menu


• Save to My Music: Songs on your

USB device can be saved to My

Music.

(1) File: Select a file to save

(2) Mark All: Select all files .

.

(3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.

(4) Save: Save the selected file(s)

.

- Select the files you want to save, and select [Save]. This saves the selected files to My Music.

- Saving is canceled if phone calls are received or made while saving.

- Up to 6,000 files can be saved.

- The currently playing file on the

USB device cannot be changed while saving.

- My Music cannot be used while saving.

- Up to 700 MB can be saved.

• Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is displayed.


4-46

i Information

- Using the iPod ® Devices

• To use the audio system’s iPod ® control function, use the dedicated cable provided with your iPod ® .

• Connecting the iPod ® to the vehicle during play may result in a loud noise that lasts about one to two seconds. Connect the iPod ® to the vehicle after stopping or pausing play.

• Connect the iPod ® with the vehicle in the ACC ON state to begin charging.

• When connecting the iPod ® cable, be sure to fully push the cable into the port.

• When EQ effects are enabled simultaneously on external devices, such as iPod ® s and the audio system, the

EQ effects may overlap, causing sound quality deterioration or distortion. Deactivate the EQ function for all external devices, if possible.

• Noise may occur when your iPod ® or the AUX port is connected.

Disconnect and store separately when not in use.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• There may be noise if the audio system is used with an iPod ® or AUX external device connected to the power jack. In these cases, disconnect the iPod ® or external device from the power jack.

• Play may be interrupted, or device malfunctions may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod ® /iPhone ® /iPad ® .

• Play may fail if your iPhone ® is connected through both Bluetooth ® and

USB. In this case, select Dock connector or Bluetooth ® on your iPhone ® to change the sound output settings.

• If your software version does not support the communication protocol or your iPod ® is not recognized due to device failure, anomalies or defects, iPod ® mode cannot be used.

• iPod ® nano (5th generation) devices may not be recognized if the battery is low. Charge sufficiently before use.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• The search and song play order in the iPod ® device may be different from the search order in the audio system.

• If the iPod ® has failed due to an internal defect, please reset the iPod ® (consult your iPod ® manual).

• Depending on the software version, the iPod ® may fail to sync with the system. If the media is removed or disconnected before recognition, the previous mode may not be restored

(iPad ® cannot be charged).

• Cables other than the 1-meter cable provided with iPod ® /iPhone ® /iPad ® products may not be recognized.

• When other music apps are used on your iPod ® , the system sync function may fail due to malfunction of the iPod ® application.

4

4-47

Multimedia System iPod ®

(1) Repeat


(2) Shuffle


(3) List


(4) Menu


(5) Album Image

View song info.

4-48

(6) Pause




Playback

Connect your iPod ® to the audio

USB port, press the [MEDIA] button, and select [iPod].

Changing songs



Search songs by turning the TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.




•

•

Repeat play


‘Repeat category’, ‘Repeat current song’ play.



•

Shuffle play


‘Shuffle category’ play.


Menu


• Information: Detailed info on the currently playing song is displayed.


When other music programs are running

When songs saved on your iPod ® are playing through a separate music app, the above screen is displayed.

(1) Play/Pause: Pause or play music .

(2) Play iPod Files: Play music saved on your iPod ® .

(3) Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

(4) Album Image: View playback info .

Play iPod Files

Select [Play iPod Files] to play songs saved on your iPod ® .

If there are no songs saved on your iPod ® , the [Play iPod Files] is disabled.

i Information

Operation cannot be carried out correctly due to iPod ® application malfunction.

i Information

- Using Bluetooth ® Audio

• Bluetooth ® Audio mode can only be used if a Bluetooth ® -enabled phone is connected. Only devices that support Bluetooth ® audio can be used.

• If the Bluetooth ® -enabled phone is disconnected during play, the music stops.

• When the TRACK UP/DOWN buttons are used during Bluetooth ® audio streaming, a popping noise or sound interruptions may occur, depending on the cell phone device.

• Depending on the cell phone model, the audio streaming function may not be supported.

• If a phone call is made or received when music is playing in Bluetooth ®

Audio mode, the call may mix with the music.

• When returning to Bluetooth ®

Audio mode after ending a call, play might not resume automatically for some cell phone models.

4

4-49

Multimedia System

NOTICE

• Bluetooth ® Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the car audio system with a

Bluetooth ® phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phone book. Before using the

Bluetooth ® , carefully read the contents of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and be the cause of accidents.

• Do not operate the device excessively while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents.

• When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

Bluetooth ® (BT) Audio

(if equipped)

(1) Repeat


(2) Shuffle


(3) Menu


(4) Play/Pause


i Information

• Some cell phone models may not support particular functions.

• Bluetooth ® audio volume is synced with cell phone media volume.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [BT Audio].

Changing songs


i Information

Some cell phones may not support this function.

4-50

•

•

•

Repeat play


‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’ or

‘Repeat category’ play.




i Information

The repeat play function is engaged, depending on the operation of the connected Bluetooth ® device.

•

•

Shuffle play


‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.



i Information

The shuffle function is engaged, depending on the operation of the connected Bluetooth ® device.

AUX

Running AUX

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [AUX].

Menu


• Connections: The currently connected

Bluetooth ® device can be changed.

• Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is displayed.


Connect the external device connection jack to the AUX terminal to run

AUX.

(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

4

4-51

Multimedia System

My Music

(1) Repeat


(2) Shuffle


(3) List


(4) Menu


(5) Album Image

View song info.

4-52

(6) Pause






Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [My Music].

My Music cannot be selected if it does not contain music.

Check the content of your USB drive before saving music to My Music.


Changing songs



Search songs by turning the TUNE knob and press the knob to play.

Repeat play

•

•

•


‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’ or

‘Repeat category’ play.




•

•

Shuffle play


‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.



Menu


(4) Delete: Delete the selected file(s)

.

- Select the file to delete, then select [Delete] to delete it.

• Add to Playlist: Frequently played songs can be paired in a [Playlist].

- Songs can be played from the

[Playlist].

• Information: Detailed info on the currently playing song is displayed.


Delete from Playlist

When a song in the playlist is playing, select [Menu] and select [Delete from Playlist].

Select the song to delete, then select

[Delete].

• Delete Files: You can delete files from My Music.

(1) File: Select saved file .

(2) Mark All: Select all files.

(3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.


i Information

- Using Bluetooth ® (BT) Phone

• Bluetooth ® is a near-field wireless networking technology that uses the

2.4 GHz frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance wirelessly.

• The technology is used in PCs, peripherals, Bluetooth ® phones, tablet PCs, household appliances and automobiles. Devices supporting Bluetooth ® can exchange data at high speeds without physical cable connections.

• Bluetooth ® Handsfree devices enable convenient access to phone functions through cell phones equipped with

Bluetooth ® .

• Some Bluetooth ® devices may not be supported by the Bluetooth ®

Handsfree function.

(Continued)

4

4-53

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• When Bluetooth ® is connected and calls are attempted through a connected cell phone from outside the vehicle, the call is connected through the Bluetooth ® Handsfree function of the vehicle.

• Please be sure to disconnect the

Bluetooth ® Handsfree function through your Bluetooth ® device or the audio screen.

Safety precautions

• The Bluetooth ® Handsfree function helps drivers to drive safely. By connecting a Bluetooth ® -enabled phone to the vehicle’s audio system, phone calls can be made and received through the audio system and contacts can be managed.

Consult the user manual before use.

• Excessive manipulation of controls while driving, making it difficult to pay attention to the road ahead, can lead to accidents. Do not operate the device excessively while driving.

• Looking at the screen for a prolonged time increases the risk of accidents. Keep time spent looking at the screen to a minimum.

Precautions when connecting

Bluetooth ® devices

• The vehicle supports the following

Bluetooth ® functions.

Some

Bluetooth ® devices may not support some functions.

1) Bluetooth ® Handsfree phone calls

2) Operations during a call

(Private, Switch, Out Vol. controls)

3) Download call history saved to the Bluetooth ® device

4) Download contacts saved to the

Bluetooth ® device

5) Automatic contacts/call history download when Bluetooth ® is connected

6) Automatic Bluetooth ® device connection when the vehicle is started

7) Bluetooth ® audio streaming playback

• Before connecting the audio system to your device, make sure your device supports Bluetooth ® .

4-54

• Even if your device supports

Bluetooth ® , a Bluetooth ® connection cannot be established if the device’s Bluetooth ® function is switched off. Search and connect with the Bluetooth ® function enabled.

• Pair or connect Bluetooth ® devices to the audio system with the vehicle at a standstill.

• If a Bluetooth ® connection is lost due to abnormal conditions while a

Bluetooth ® device is connected

(communication range exceeded, device power OFF, communication errors, etc.), the disconnected

Bluetooth ® device is searched for and automatically reconnected.

• If you want to disable the

Bluetooth ® device auto-connect function, turn the Bluetooth ® function OFF on your device. Consult the user manuals for individual devices to see whether Bluetooth ® is supported.

• Handsfree call quality and volume may vary depending on the type of


• Some Bluetooth ® devices are subject to intermittent Bluetooth ® connection failures. In this case, use the following method.

1) Turn the Bluetooth ® function off on your Bluetooth ® device

➟

Turn it on and try again.

2) Delete the paired device from both the audio system and

Bluetooth ® device, then pair again.

3) Power down your Bluetooth ® device ➟ Turn it on and try again.

4) Completely remove the battery from your Bluetooth ® device; reinsert it, reboot, and attempt connection.

5) Restart the vehicle and reattempt connection.

Pairing a Bluetooth ® device

Information on pairing Bluetooth ® devices

• Pairing refers to the process of pairing Bluetooth ® cell phones or devices with the system prior to connection. This is a necessary procedure for Bluetooth ® connection and usage.

• Up to five devices can be paired.

• Pairing Bluetooth ® device is not allowed while vehicle is moving.

Pairing the first Bluetooth ® device

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control

➟ Search for the vehicle from the

Bluetooth ® device, and pair

➟

Enter the passkey on the Bluetooth ® device or approve passkey

➟

Bluetooth ® pairing completed.

1. When the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control is pressed, the following screen is displayed. Devices can now be paired.

4-55

4

Multimedia System

(1) Vehicle Name: Searched name in


i Information

The vehicle name in the image above is an example. Refer to your device for the actual name of your device.

4-1. For devices that require passkey entry, a passkey entry screen is shown on your Bluetooth ® device.

- Enter the passkey ‘0000’, in your


4-2. For devices that require passkey confirmation, the following screen is shown on the audio system. A 6-digit passkey input screen is shown in the


i Information

The 6-digit passkey in the image above is an example. Refer to your vehicle for the actual passkey.

Pairing a second Bluetooth ® device

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth] ➟

Select [Connections]

➟

Select [Add

New].

2. Search for available Bluetooth ® devices in the Bluetooth ® menu of your Bluetooth ® device (cell phone, etc.).

3. Confirm that the vehicle name in your Bluetooth ® device matches the vehicle name shown on the audio screen, then select it.

- After confirming that the 6-digit passkey on the audio screen and the Bluetooth ® device are identical, select [OK] in your


- The pairing procedure from this point is identical to [Pairing the first

Bluetooth device].

4-56

i Information

• Bluetooth ® standby mode lasts for three minutes. If a device is not paired within three minutes, pairing is canceled. Start over from the beginning.

• For most Bluetooth ® devices, a connection is established automatically after pairing. Some devices, however, require separate confirmation when connecting after pairing. Be sure to check your Bluetooth ® device after pairing to confirm that it has connected.

Connecting Bluetooth ® devices

If there are no connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button in the steering wheel remote control

➟

List of paired Bluetooth ® devices ➟

Select the desired Bluetooth ® device from the list ➟ Connect Bluetooth ® .

If there are connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system

➟

Select [Settings]

➟

Select [Connections] ➟ Select

Bluetooth ® device to connect

➟

Select

[Connect] ➟ Connect Bluetooth ® .

4 i Information


• When a Bluetooth ® device is connected, other devices cannot be paired.

4-57

Multimedia System

Accepting/rejecting phone calls

Receiving phone calls with

Bluetooth ® connected.

i Information

• When the incoming call screen is displayed, audio mode and the settings screen cannot be shown. Only call volume control is supported.

• Some Bluetooth ® devices may not support the call reject function.

• Some Bluetooth ® devices may not support the phone number display function.

Operation during calls

Incoming call with Bluetooth ® connected ➟ Select [Accept].

(1) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.

(2) Incoming phone number:

Incoming phone number is displayed.

(3) Accept: Accept call.

(4) Reject: Reject call.

(1) Call duration: Call duration display.

(2) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.

(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.

(4) Keypad: Number keypad for

Automatic Response Service input is displayed.

(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell phone.

(6) Outgoing Volume: Adjust outgoing voice volume.

(7) End: End call.

4-58

i Information

• Some Bluetooth ® devices may not support the Private function.

• The outgoing voice volume may vary depending on the type of

Bluetooth ® device. If the outgoing voice volume is too high or low, adjust the Outgoing Volume.

Favorites

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Favorites] ➟

Favorites list displayed.

(1) Favorites list: A list of paired favorites is displayed.

Connect a call when selected.

(2) Add to Favorites: Add a downloaded phone number to favorites.

(3) Delete: Delete a saved favorite.

i Information

• Up to 20 favorites can be saved for each connected Bluetooth ® device.

• Favorites can be accessed when the

Bluetooth ® device they were paired from is connected.

• The audio system does not download favorites from Bluetooth ® devices. Favorites must be newly saved before use.

• To add to favorites, contacts must be downloaded first.

• Saved favorites are not updated even if the contacts of the connected

Bluetooth ® device are changed. In this case, favorites need to be deleted and added again.

4

4-59

Multimedia System

Call History

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Call History]

➟

Call history is displayed.

i Information

• Up to 50 dialed, received and missed calls are saved.

• When the latest call history is received, the existing call history is deleted.

Contacts

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Contacts] ➟

Select letter (ABC)

➟

Contacts displayed.

(1) Call History: Display the downloaded call history list.


(2) Sort by: Sort by All Calls, Dialed

Calls, Received Calls or Missed

Calls.

(3) Download: Download call history from connected Bluetooth ® devices.

(1) Contacts: Display downloaded contacts.


(2) Download: Download contacts from connected Bluetooth ® devices.

4-60

i Information

• Only supported contacts format can be downloaded and displayed from the Bluetooth device, contacts from some applications will not be included.

• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.

• In some cases, additional confirmation from your Bluetooth ® device is necessary when downloading contacts. If downloading of contacts unsuccessful, consult your Bluetooth ® device’s settings or the audio screen to approve the download.

• Contacts without phone numbers are not displayed.

Dial

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Dial].

(5) Call

- Enter and select a phone number to call.

- Select without entering a phone number to see the most recent dialed call.

(1) Phone number entry window: The phone number entered using the keypad is displayed.

(2) Clear

- Shortly press to delete individual digits.

- Press and hold to delete the entire phone number.

(3) Keypad: Enter phone number.

(4) Bluetooth ® Phone name

- The name of the connected

Bluetooth ® device is displayed.

- Contacts matching the keypad number/letter input are displayed.

Settings

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Settings].

- For more details, refer to Setup ➟

Bluetooth page.

4-61

4

Multimedia System

Setup

Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth*, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system.

* if equipped

Display

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Display].

• Mode: Brightness is automatically adjusted according to the headlight use.

• Illumination: The brightness of the audio screen can be changed.

• Text Scroll: If text is too long to be displayed on the screen, enable the text scroll function.

Sound

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Sound].

• Position: Sound balance and fader can be adjusted.

• Tone: Sound tone color can be adjusted.

• Arkamys Sound Mood: Provides the sound control options for

Arkamys™ sound mood.

• Back-up Warning Priority:

Automatically lower audio volume while reversing.

• Speed Dependent Volume:

Automatically adjust volume based on vehicle speed.

• Beep: Select whether to play a beep sound when the screen is touched.

4-62

Date/Time

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].

• Set Time: Set the time displayed on the audio screen.

• Time Format: Choose between 12hour and 24-hour time formats.

• Set Date: Set the date displayed on the audio screen.

Bluetooth (if equipped)

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth].

• Connections: Control pairing, deletion, connection and disconnection of Bluetooth ® devices.

• Auto Connection Priority: Set the connection priority of Bluetooth ® devices when the vehicle is started.

• Download Contacts: Contacts can be downloaded from connected

Bluetooth ® devices.

i Information

• When paired devices are deleted, the call history and contacts of the device saved to the audio system are deleted.

• For Bluetooth ® connections with low connection priority, some time may be required for the connection to be established.

• Contacts can be downloaded only from the currently connected


• If no Bluetooth ® device is connected, the Download Contacts button is disabled.

System

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system ➟ Select [System].

• Memory Information: View My

Music memory usage.

• Language: Change the user language.

• Default: Reset the audio system.

i Information

• The system resets to the default values, and all saved data and settings are lost.

Screen Saver

Set the information displayed when the audio system is switched off or the screen is turned off.

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system

➟

Select [Screen

Saver].

• Analog: An analog clock is displayed.

• Digital: A digital clock is displayed.

• None: No information is displayed.

Display Off

To prevent glare, the screen can be turned off with the audio system in operation.

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system

➟

Select [Display Off].

i Information

Use ‘Screen Saver’ to set the information to be displayed when the screen is turned off.

4-63

4

Multimedia System

D ec attiio

CE for EU

n o nffo

4-64

FCC Warning

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the FCC.

4-65

4

Multimedia System

NCC for Taiwan

4-66

Driving your vehicle

Before driving.........................................................5-3

Before entering the vehicle ...........................................5-3

Before starting...................................................................5-3

Ignition switch ........................................................5-4

Key ignition switch............................................................5-5

Engine Start/Stop button ................................................5-9

Manual transmission............................................5-18

Manual transmission operation ...................................5-18

Good driving practices ...................................................5-20

Automatic transmission.......................................5-21

Automatic transmission operation ..............................5-21

Parking...............................................................................5-25

Good driving practices ...................................................5-25

Braking system.....................................................5-27

Power brakes ...................................................................5-27

Disc brakes wear indicator ...........................................5-28

Rear drum brakes ...........................................................5-28

Parking brake ...................................................................5-28

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-30

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-32

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-34

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-35

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) ......................................5-36

Good braking practices..................................................5-36

Cruise control .......................................................5-38

Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-38

Special driving conditions...................................5-43

Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-43

Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-43

Smooth cornering ...........................................................5-44

Driving at night ................................................................5-44

Driving in the rain ...........................................................5-44

Driving in flooded areas................................................5-45

Highway driving ...............................................................5-45

Winter driving.......................................................5-46

Snow or icy conditions ..................................................5-46

Winter Precautions .........................................................5-48

Vehicle weight ......................................................5-50

Overloading.......................................................................5-50

5


WARNING

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you must drive with the trunk open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

5-2

B EF RE RIIV G

Before entering the vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean and unobstructed.

• Remove frost, snow, or ice.

• Visually check the tires for uneven wear and damage.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Before starting

• Make sure the hood, the trunk, and the doors are securely closed and locked.

• Adjust the position of the seat and steering wheel.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.

• Verify all the lights work.

• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

• Check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel and the messages on the instrument display when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check that any items you are carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. For more information, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

• Always drive defensively.

Assume other drivers or pedestrians may be careless and make mistakes.

• Stay focused on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause accidents.

• Leave plenty of space between you and the vehicle in front of you.

5

5-3


WARNING

NEVER drink or take drugs and drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and driving is dangerous and may result in an accident and SERI-

OUS INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Just one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions and emergencies and your reaction time gets worse with each additional drink.

Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving under the influence of alcohol.

(Continued)

(Continued)

You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a taxi.

IIG NIIT N S WIIT H

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• NEVER allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the ignition switch or related parts.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.

• NEVER reach through the steering wheel for the ignition switch, or any other control, while the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or arm in this area may cause a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

5-4

Key ignition switch

(if equipped)

OAE056172L

WARNING

• NEVER turn the ignition switch to the LOCK or ACC position while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in 1 st gear (for manual transmission vehicle) or P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) position, apply the parking brake, and turn ignition switch to the

LOCK position.

Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

5-5

5


Key ignition switch positions

Switch

Position

LOCK

Action

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, put the key in at the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK position.

The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.

(if equipped)

Notes

ACC

Electrical accessories are usable.

The steering wheel unlocks.

If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release tension.

ON

START

This is the normal key position when the engine has started.

All features and accessories are usable.

The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition switch from ACC to ON.

To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START position.

The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.

Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.

The engine will crank until you release the key.

5-6

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake, accelerator and clutch pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake padel is released when the rpm is high.

Starting the gasoline engine

Vehicle with manual transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.

3. Depress the clutch and brake pedals.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

i

Information

• It is best to maintain a moderate engine speed until the vehicle engine comes up to normal operating temperature. Avoid harsh or abrupt acceleration or deceleration while the engine is still cold.

• Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not race the engine while warming it up.

i

Information

Depress the brake pedal and clutch pedal until the engine starts.

Vehicle with automatic transmission:



(Park).

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated and then it has to be warmed up, before starting to drive.





5-7

5


4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to pre-heat the engine.

The glow indicator light ( ) will illuminate.

5. When the glow indicator light ( ) goes out, turn the key ignition switch to the START position. Hold the key (maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

NOTICE

If the engine does not start within

10 seconds after preheating is completed, turn the ignition switch once more to the LOCK position and wait for 10 seconds.

Then turn the ignition switch to the ON position in order to preheat the engine again.

Vehicle with automatic transmission :



(Park).


4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to pre-heat the engine.

The glow indicator light ( ) will illuminate.

5. When the glow indicator light ( ) goes out, turn the key ignition switch to the START position. Hold the key (maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in the START position for more than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10 seconds before trying again.

• Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position with the engine running. It may damage the starter.

• If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

5-8

Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine immediately after starting the engine.

If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbocharger.

2. After high speed or extended driving that requires heavy engine load, idle the engine about 1 minute before turning the engine off.

This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

NOTICE

Do not turn off the engine immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbocharger.

Engine Start/Stop button

OYC056001

Whenever the front door is opened, the Engine Start/Stop button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds after the door is closed. (if equipped)

WARNING

To turn the engine off in an emergency:

Press and hold the Engine Start/

Stop button for more than two seconds OR rapidly press and release the Engine Start/Stop button three times (within three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the

N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

• NEVER press the Engine Start/

Stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, press the Engine Start/

Stop button to the OFF position, and take the Smart Key with you. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

5

5-9


Engine Start/Stop button positions

- Vehicle with manual transmission

Button Position

OFF

Action Notes

To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and then press the Engine Start/Stop button.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft. (if equipped)

If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the warning chime will sound.

5-10

Not illuminated

ACC

Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the clutch pedal.



If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.

If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly, the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left to release tension.

Orange indicator

- Vehicle with manual transmission

Button Position

ON

Action

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the clutch pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started.

Notes

Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.

Blue indicator

START

To start the engine, depress the clutch and brake pedals and press the Engine Start/

Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the clutch pedal, the engine does not start and the Engine

Start/Stop button changes as follows:

OFF

→

ACC

→

ON

→

OFF or ACC

5

Not illuminated

5-11


Engine Start/Stop button positions

- Vehicle with automatic transmission

Button Position

OFF

Action Notes

To turn off the engine, press the Engine

Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).

When you press the Engine Start/Stop button without the shift lever in P (Park), the

Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft. (if equipped)

If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the warning chime will sound.

Not illuminated

ACC

Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.



If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.

If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly, the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left to release tension.

Orange indicator

5-12

- Vehicle with automatic transmission

Button Position

ON

Action

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started.

Notes

Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.

Blue indicator

START

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N

(Neutral) position.

For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the brake pedal, the engine does not start and the Engine

Start/Stop button changes as follows:

OFF

→

ACC

→

ON

→

OFF or ACC

5

Not illuminated

5-13


Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake, accelerator and clutch pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake pedal is released when the rpm is high.

i

Information

• The engine will start by pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from the driver, the engine may not start.

• When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the " " indicator will blink and the warning "Key not in vehicle" will come on, and if all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart key in the vehicle when using the ACC position or if the vehicle engine is ON.

Starting the gasoline engine


1. Always carry the smart key with you.




5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

i

Information

Depress the brake pedal and clutch pedal until the engine starts.

5-14

Vehicle with automatic transmission:




(Park).


5 Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated and then it has to be warmed up, before starting to drive.





4. Depress the clutch and brake pedal.


6. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the glow indicator light

( ) goes out.

7. When the glow indicator light ( ) goes out, the engine will start.

Vehicle with automatic transmission :




(Park).



6. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the glow indicator light

( ) goes out.

7. When the glow indicator light ( ) goes out, the engine will start.

i

Information

If the Engine Start/Stop button is pressed while the engine is pre-heating, the engine may start.

5

5-15


Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine immediately after starting the engine.

If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbocharger.

2. After high speed or extended driving that requires heavy engine load, idle the engine about 1 minute before turning the engine off.

This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

NOTICE

Do not turn off the engine immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbocharger.

NOTICE


• If the engine stalls while you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position.

If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and press the Engine Start/Stop button in an attempt to restart the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

NOTICE


Do not press the Engine Start/

Stop button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If you are not able to replace the fuse, you can start the engine by pressing and holding the

Engine Start/Stop button for 10 seconds with the Engine Start/

Stop button in the ACC position.

For your safety always depress the brake and/or clutch pedal before starting the engine.

5-16

i

Information

• It is best to maintain a moderate engine speed until the vehicle engine comes up to normal operating temperature. Avoid harsh or abrupt acceleration or deceleration while the engine is still cold.

• Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not race the engine while warming it up.

OHCR056004 i

Information

If the smart key battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key in the direction of the picture above.

5

5-17


M AN AL RA MIIS SIIO

Manual transmission operation

The shift lever can be moved without pressing the button (1).

The button (1) must be pressed while moving the shift lever.

OAD055004

The manual transmission has 6 forward gears. The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

EQ UIIP D))

WARNING

Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is in 1 st gear when the vehicle is parked on a uphill and in R

(Reverse) on a downhill, set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

i

Information

During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transmission lubricant has warmed up.

Using the clutch

The clutch pedal should be depressed all the way before:

- Starting the engine

The engine will not start without depressing the clutch pedal.

- Shifting into gear, up shifting to the next higher gear, or down shifting to the next low gear.

To shift to R (Reverse), make sure the vehicle has completely stopped, and then move the shift lever to neutral before moving into R (Reverse).

When releasing the clutch pedal, release it slowly. The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving.

When you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1 st gear or R (Reverse):

1. Put the shift lever in neutral and release the clutch pedal.

2. Depress the clutch pedal, and then shift into first or R (Reverse) gear.

5-18

NOTICE

To prevent unnecessary wear or damage to the clutch:

• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.

• Do not hold the vehicle with the clutch on an incline, while waiting for the traffic light, etc.

• Always depress the clutch pedal down fully to prevent noise or damage.

• Do not depress the clutch pedal again until it is fully released.

• Do not start with the 2 nd (second) gear engaged except when you start on a slippery road.

• Do not drive with cargo loaded more than the required loading capacity.

Downshifting

Down shift to a lower gear when slowing down in heavy traffic or driving up a steep hill to prevent high engine loads.

Also, downshifting reduces the chance of stalling help reaccelerate the vehicle when you need to increase your speed.

When the vehicle is going downhill, downshifting helps maintain safe speed by providing brake power from the engine and results in less wear on the brakes.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the engine, clutch and transmission:

• When downshifting from 5 th gear to 4 th gear, be careful not to inadvertently push the shift lever sideways engaging the 2 nd gear.

A drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point the tachometer will enter the red-zone and may cause engine damage.

• Do not downshift more than two gear at a time or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such downshifting may damage the engine, clutch and the transmission.

5

5-19


Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This is extremely dangerous.

• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause the brakes and related parts to overheat and malfunction.

When you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. Engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you shift into R

(Reverse) to prevent damage to the transmission.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident

WARNING

Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a higher gear to lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may slip causing an accident.

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.

In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

(Continued)

5-20

(Continued)

• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

A UT MA C T RA MIIS SIIO F E QU PE

Manual shift mode

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.

Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.

The shift lever can freely operate.

OYC056006

Automatic transmission operation

The automatic transmission has six forward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.

5

5-21


WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into

D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, then set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.

• When using Manual Shift

Mode, do not use engine braking (shifting from a high gear to lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may slip causing an accident.

Shift lever position

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must depress firmly on the brake pedal and make sure your foot is off the accelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above and still cannot shift the lever out of

P (Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in this chapter.

The shift lever must be in P (Park) before turning the engine off.

•

•

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

After the vehicle has stopped, always make sure the shift lever is in P (Park), apply the parking brake, and turn the engine off.

Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion.

5-22

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not engaged.

Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop with the engine ON. Shift into

P (Park) if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason.

Always depress the brake pedal when you are shifting from N

(Neutral) to another gear.

WARNING

Do not shift into gear unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Shifting into gear when the engine is running at high speed can cause the vehicle to move very rapidly. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit people or objects.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transmission will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill, depress the accelerator fully. The transmission will automatically downshift to the next lower gear (or gears, as appropriate).

The DRIVE MODE switch, located on the shift lever console, allows the driver to switch from NORMAL mode to

ECO or SPORT mode. (if equipped)

For more information, refer to

"Drive Mode Integrated Control

System" later in this chapter.

OYC056007

Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, manual shift mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the

D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In manual shift mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to select the desired range of gears for the current driving conditions.

+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

5-23

5

Driving your vehicle i

Information

• Only the six forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.

• Downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1 st gear is automatically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches the red zone the transmission will upshift automatically.

• If the driver presses the lever to

+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the transmission may not make the requested gear change if the next gear is outside of the allowable engine rpm range.

The driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine rpms below the red zone.

• When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the + (Up) position. This causes the transmission to shift into the 2 nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road.

Push the shift lever to the - (Down) side to shift back to the 1 st gear.

(Continued)

5-24

(Continued)

• When driving in manual shift mode, slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged if the engine rpms are outside of the allowable range.

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the automatic transmission has a shift-lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P

(Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

Shift-lock release

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R

(Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, and then do the following:

OHCI047690

1. Place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Push the shift-lock release button.

4. Move the shift lever while pushing the shift-lock release button.

5. Stop pushing the shift-lock release button.

6. Depress the brake pedal, and then restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift-lock release, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer immediately.

Ignition key interlock system

(if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key with you when exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

• When you stay in the vehicle with the engine running, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. The engine or exhaust system may overheat and start a fire.

• The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot.

Keep away from the exhaust system components.

• Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry grass, paper or leaves. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not move the shift lever to N

(Neutral) when driving. Doing so may result in an accident because of a loss of engine braking and the transmission could be damaged.

• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but consistent pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

• Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. Do not depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

5

5-25


• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident

• Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator.

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.

In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

5-26

B RA KIIN G S ST M

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work.

You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal.

This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

• When descending down a long or steep hill, move the shift lever to Manual Shift mode and manually downshift to a lower gear in order to control your speed without using the brake pedal excessively. Applying the brakes continuously will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Wet brakes may impair the vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, lightly tap the brake pedal to heat up the brakes while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal. Avoid driving at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

5

5-27


Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Note that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

NOTICE

To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

i

Information

Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

Rear drum brakes

(if equipped)

Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators. Therefore, have the rear brake linings inspected if you hear a rear brake rubbing noise. Also have your rear brakes inspected each time you change or rotate your tires and when you have the front brakes replaced.

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

OYC056015

Always set the parking brake before leaving the vehicle, to apply:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Pull up the parking brake lever as far as possible.

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.

5-28

Releasing the parking brake

OYC056016

To release:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

While pressing the release button

(1), slightly pull up on the parking brake lever then lower the parking brake lever (2).

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the

1st gear (for manual transmission vehicle) or P (Park, for automatic transmission) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles with the parking brake not fully engaged are at risk for moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.

• NEVER allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.

• Only release the parking brake when you are seated inside the vehicle with your foot firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator pedal while the parking brake is engaged. If you depress the accelerator pedal with the parking brake engaged, warning will sound. Damage to the parking brake may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear or damage to brake parts. Make sure the parking brake is released and the Brake Warning Light is off before driving.

5

5-29


Check the Parking

Brake Warning Light by placing the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine).

This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is released and the Brake

Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light remains on after the parking brake is released while engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

(if equipped)

WARNING

An Anti-Lock Braking System

(ABS) or an Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead of you. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with ABS or ESC may be longer than for those without these systems in the following road conditions.

Drive your vehicle at reduced speeds during the following conditions:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

(Continued)

5-30

(Continued)

• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.

• Tire chains are installed on your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS or ESC equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

ABS is an electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid.

ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time.

Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Depress your brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that results from sudden changes in direction, such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change.

Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. Always steer moderately when braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay on for several seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position.

During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. We recommend that you contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the ABS warning light ( ) is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. Your power brakes will work normally. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, we recommend that you contact your HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and apply your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light ( ) may illuminate. Pull your car over to a safe place and turn the engine off.

Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a problem with your ABS system. We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

i

Information

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the ABS warning light ( ) may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning.

Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

5-31

5


Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) (if equipped)

■ Type A

■

Type B

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. The ESC system will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers, and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can result in severe accidents.

OHCI057010

The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers.

ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going.

ESC applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle’s brakes and intervenes in the engine management system to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path.

It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the ESC and the ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds. After both lights go off, the ESC is enabled.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

engine may not respond to the accelerator as it does under routine conditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use when the ESC activates, the Cruise

Control automatically disengages.

The Cruise Control can be reengaged when the road conditions allow.

See "Cruise Control System" later in this chapter.

(if equipped)

• When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) may not increase even if you press the accelerator pedal deeply. This is to maintain the stability and traction of the vehicle and does not indicate a problem.

5-32

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 2

• State 1

Indicator lights

■

ESC indicator light (blinks)

■

ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

OHCR056013

Press the ESC OFF button briefly.

The ESC OFF indicator light and message (vehicles equipped with a supervision cluster) will illuminate. In this state, the traction control function of ESC (engine management) is disabled, but the brake control function of ESC (braking management) still operates.

OHCR056014

Press and hold the ESC OFF button continuously for more than 3 seconds. The ESC OFF indicator light and message (vehicles equipped with a supervision cluster) illuminates and a warning chime sounds.

In this state, both the traction control function of ESC (engine management) and the brake control function of ESC (braking management) are disabled.

If the ignition switch is placed to the

LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,

ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

When the ignition switch is pressed to the ON position, the ESC indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the

ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever the ESC is operating.

If ESC indicator light stays on, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ESC system. When this warning light illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

5-33

5


WARNING

When the ESC is blinking, this indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER attempt to accelerate. NEVER turn the

ESC off while the ESC indicator light is blinking or you may lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized wheels and tires installed.

To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the transmission:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively while the

ESC, ABS, and parking brake warning lights are displayed. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights are displayed.

• When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, make sure the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud by temporarily stopping operation of the ESC to maintain wheel torque.

5-34 i

Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or standard brake system operation.

Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) (if equipped)

The Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) is a function of the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system. It helps ensure the vehicle stays stable when accelerating or braking suddenly on wet, slippery and rough roads where traction over the four tires can suddenly become uneven.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Vehicle Stability

Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead.The VSM is not a substitute for safe driving practices.

• Never drive too fast for the road conditions. The VSM system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in bad weather, slippery and uneven roads can result in severe accidents.

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately above 15 km/h (9 mph) on curve roads.

• Vehicle speed is approximately above 20 km/h (12 mph) when the vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may activate the

ESC, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your VSM is active.

VSM OFF condition

To cancel VSM operation, press the

ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator light ( ) will illuminate.

To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF button again. The ESC OFF indicator light will go out.

WARNING

If ESC indicator light ( ) or

EPS warning light ( ) stays on or blinks, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the

VSM system. When the warning light illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

(if equipped)

A vehicle has the tendency to slide backwards on a steep slope, before depressing the accelerator after a stop. The HAC prevents the vehicle from sliding backwards by automatically operating the brake systems for about 2 seconds. The brake systems are automatically released, when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

The HAC is activated only for about 2 seconds, so always depress the accelerator pedal to begin driving upwards after a stop.

i

Information

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such as gradient or incline

• Driving rearward.

• ESC OFF indicator light is on.

• EPS (Electric Power Steering) warning light ( ) is on or blinks.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the VSM system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size.

Never drive the vehicle with different sized tires and wheels installed.

i

Information

• The HAC does not operate when the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

• The HAC activates even when the

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is off. However, it does not activate, when the ESC does not normally operate.

5-35

5


Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)

(if equipped)

The Emergency Stop Signal system alerts the driver behind by blinking the stop lights, while sharply and severely braking.

The system is activated when:

• The vehicle suddenly stops. (The deceleration power exceeds 7 m/s 2 , and the driving speed exceeds 55 km/h (34 mph).)

• The ABS is activated.

The hazard warning flasher automatically turns ON after blinking the stop lights, when the driving speed is under 40 km/h (25 mph) and ABS is deactivated or the sudden braking situation is over.

The hazard warning flasher turns

OFF, when the driving speed exceeds

10 km/h (6 mph) after a complete stop. The hazard warning flasher turns OFF, when the vehicle drives at a low speed for a certain period of time. The driver can manually turn

OFF the hazard warning flasher by pressing the button.

i

Information

The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) system will not work if the hazard warning flasher already blinks.

Good braking practices

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles parked with the parking brake not applied or not fully engaged may roll inadvertently and may cause injury to the driver and others. ALWAYS apply the parking brake before exiting the vehicle.

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The brakes may get wet if the vehicle is driven through standing water or if it is washed.

5-36

Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and we recommend that you call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but constant pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear, and possibly even brake failure.

If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped to prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.

If your vehicle is equipped with an

Automatic Transmission, don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

Be cautious when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (automatic transmission). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling.

If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling.

If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P

(automatic transmission) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.

Then release the parking brake.

Do not hold the vehicle on an incline with the accelerator pedal.

This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

5

5-37


C RU E C NT RO F E QU PE

Cruise Control operation

■ Type A

The Cruise Control system allows you to drive at speeds above 30 km/h

(20 mph) without depressing the accelerator pedal.

■ Type B

1. Cruise indicator

2. SET indicator

OHCI057020

OHCI057021

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Always set the vehicle speed under the speed limit in your country.

• If the Cruise Control is left on,

(cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally.

Keep the Cruise Control system off (cruise indicator light

OFF) when the Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the Cruise Control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use the Cruise Control when it may be unsafe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads windy roads

- When driving in windy areas

• Do not use cruise control when towing a trailer.

NOTICE

During cruise-speed driving of a manual transmission vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, as the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or press the cruise control

ON / OFF button.

5-38

i

Information

• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will activate after approximately 3 seconds.

This delay is normal.

• Before activating the cruise control function, the system will check to verify that the brake switch is operating normally. Depress the brake pedal at least once after turning ON the ignition or starting the vehicle.

■ Type A

■

Type B

To set Cruise Control speed

■ Type A

■ Type B

OHCI057022

Cruise control switch

CANCEL/O : Cancels cruise control operation.

CRUISE/ : Turns cruise control system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

OHCI057023

1. Press the CRUISE/ button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The CRUISE/ indicator will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 30 km/h

(20 mph).

i

Information

- Manual transmission

For manual transmission vehicles, you should depress the brake pedal at least once to set the cruise control after starting the engine.

5

5-39


■ Type A

To increase Cruise Control speed

■ Type A

■

Type B

■ Type B

OHCI057024

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and release it. The SET indicator light will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

i

Information

On a steep slope, the vehicle may slightly slow down or speed up, while driving uphill or downhill.

OHCI057025

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and hold it, while monitoring the

SET speed on the instrument cluster.

Release the toggle switch when the desired speed is shown and the vehicle will accelerate to that speed.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase 2.0

km/h (1.2 mph) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).

5-40

To decrease Cruise Control speed

■ Type A

■ Type B

OHCI057024

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-) and hold it.Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the toggle switch at the speed you want to maintain.

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease 2.0

km/h (1.2 mph) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).

To temporarily accelerate with the Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at the increased speed, the

Cruise Control will maintain the increased speed.

Cruise Control will be canceled when:

■ Type A

■ Type B

OHCI057026

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Depressing the clutch pedal.

(for manual transmission vehicle)

• Pressing the CANCEL/O button located on the steering wheel.

• Pressing the CRUISE/ button.

Both the CRUISE/ indicator and the SET indicator will turn OFF.

• Moving the shift lever into N

(Neutral). (for automatic transmission vehicle)

5

5-41


• Decreasing the vehicle speed to less than approximately 30 km/h

(20 mph).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating.

• Downshifting to the 2nd gear in manual shift mode. (for automatic transmission vehicle)

To resume preset Cruising speed

■ Type A

■ Type B i

Information

Each of the above actions will cancel

Cruise Control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but only pressing the

CRUISE/ button will turn the system off. If you wish to resume Cruise

Control operation, push the toggle switch up (RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed, unless the system was turned off using the

CRUISE/ button.

To turn Cruise Control off

■ Type A

■ Type B

OHCI057025

Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If the vehicle speed is over 30 km/h (20 mph), the vehicle will resume the preset speed.

OHCI057023

Press the CRUISE/

CRUISE/ off).

button (the indicator light will go

5-42

S PE CIIA L D VIIN G C ND TIIO

Hazardous driving conditions

S

When hazardous driving elements are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud and sand, take the bellow suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and keep a longer braking distance.

• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.

• When your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear.

Accelerate slowly to avoid unnecessary wheel spin.

• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or other non-slip materials under the wheels to provide additional traction while the vehicle becomes stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear.

Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and do not race the engine.

To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle.

WARNING

Downshifting with an automatic transmission while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stuck and excessive wheel spin occurs, the temperature in the tires can increase very quickly. If the tires become damaged, a tire blow out or tire explosion can occur.

This condition is dangerous you and others may be injured.

Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle.

If you attempt to free the vehicle, the vehicle can overheat quickly, possibly causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Try to avoid spinning the wheels as much as possible to prevent overheating of either the tires or the engine.

DO NOT allow the vehicle to spin the wheels above 56 km/h

(35 mph).

5

5-43

Driving your vehicle i

Information

The ESC system (if equipped) must be turned OFF before rocking the vehicle.

NOTICE

If you are still stuck after rocking the vehicle a few times, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating, possible damage to the transmission, and tire damage. See "Towing" in chapter 6.

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at night

Night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight. Here are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlamps.

• Keep your headlamps clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlamps will make it much more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlamps of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop your vehicle.

• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if equipped)

• Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

• Be sure your tires have enough tread. If your tires do not have enough tread, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident.

See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7 .

• Turn on your headlamps to make it easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

5-44

• If you believe your brakes may be wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough, your vehicle may have little or no contact with the road surface and actually ride on the water. The best advice is SLOW

DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the depth of tire tread decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be reduced.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

Driving at higher speeds on the highway consumes more fuel and is less efficient than driving at a slower, more moderate speed. Maintain a moderate speed in order to conserve fuel when driving on the highway.

Be sure to check both the engine coolant level and the engine oil before driving.

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.

Under-inflation may overheat or damage the tires.

Do not install worn-out or damaged tires, which may reduce traction or fail the braking operation.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.

i

Information

Never over-inflate your tires above the maximum inflation pressure, as specified on your tires.

5

5-45


WIIN TE R D VIIN G

The severe weather conditions of winter quickly wear out tires and cause other problems. To minimize winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions:

Snow or icy conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause the vehicle to skid.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires.

Always carry emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

WARNING

Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure to use radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle’s handling in all weather conditions.

The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

i

Information

Do not install studded tires without first checking local and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Tire chains

OHCR066020

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner than other types of tires, they may be damaged by mounting some types of tire chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of tire chains.

Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; if unavoidable use a wire type chain. If tire chains must be used, use genuine HYUNDAI parts and install the tire chain after reviewing the instructions provided with the tire chains.

Damage to your vehicle caused by improper tire chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s warranty.

5-46

WARNING

The use of tire chains may adversely affect vehicle handling:

• Drive less than 30 km/h (20 mph) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked wheel braking.

i

Information

• Install tire chains on the front tires.

It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tires will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

• Do not install studded tires without first checking local and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Chain Installation

When installing tire chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly possible. Drive slowly (less than 30 km/h (20 mph)) with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until the noise stops. Remove the tire chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning Flasher and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle (if available).

Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.

NOTICE

When using tire chains:

• Wrong size chains or improperly installed chains can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.

• Use SAE "S" class or wire chains.

• If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to prevent contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving

0.5~1.0 km (0.3~0.6 miles).

• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels. If unavoidable, use a wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 12 mm

(0.47 in) wide to prevent damage to the chain's connection.

5

5-47


Winter Precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

The winter temperature increases the battery consumption.

Inspect the battery and cables, as specified in the chapter 7.

The battery charging level can be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or in a service station.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect the spark plugs, as specified in the chapter 7.

If necessary, replace them. Also check all ignition wirings and components for any cracks, wear-out, and damage.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some regions during winter, it is recommended to use the "winter weight" oil with lower viscosity. For further information, refer to the chapter 8. When you are not sure about a type of winter weight oil, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

To prevent locks from freezing

To prevent the locks from being frozen, spray approved de-icing fluid or glycerin into key holes. When a lock opening is already covered with ice, spray approved de-icing fluid over the ice to remove it. When an internal part of a lock freezes, try to thaw it with a heated key. Carefully use the heated key to avoid an injury.

5-48

Use approved window washer anti-freeze solution in system

To prevent the window washer from being frozen, add authorized window washer anti-freeze solution, as specified on the window washer container. Window washer anti-freeze solution is available from an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer, and so are the most vehicle accessory outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze solution to prevent any damage to the vehicle paint.

Do not let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. When there is the risk that your parking brake may freeze, temporarily apply it with the shift lever in P (Park). Also, block the rear wheels in advance, so the vehicle may not roll. Then, release the parking brake.

Carry emergency equipment

In accordance with weather conditions, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment, while driving.

Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

Do not let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in such conditions during the severe winter, you should check underneath the vehicle on a regular basis, so that moving the front wheels and the steering components is unblocked.

Do not place objects or materials in the engine compartment

Putting objects or materials in the engine compartment may cause an engine failure or combustion, because those may block the engine cooling. Such damage will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.

5

5-49


V EH LE EIIG T

Two labels on your driver’s door sill show how much weight your vehicle was designed to carry: the Tire and

Loading Information Label and the

Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the Certification Label:

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Certification Label.

The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Base Curb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

Vehicle Curb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Certification Label located on the driver’s door sill.

Overloading

WARNING

The Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the Certification

Label attached to the driver's

(or front passenger’s) door.

Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (and people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.

5-50

What to do in an emergency

Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2

In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-2

If the engine stalls while driving ...................................6-2

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .........6-2

If you have a flat tire while driving..............................6-3

If the engine will not start ...................................6-3

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly...............................................................6-3

If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start .......................................................................6-4

Jump starting ..........................................................6-4

If the engine overheats ........................................6-7

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-9

Description ..........................................................................6-9

TPMS reset procedure.....................................................6-9

Tire pressure monitoring system ................................6-11

Low tire pressure telltale ..............................................6-12

Low tire pressure position and tire pressure telltale .......................................................6-12

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator .....................................................6-14

Changing a tire with TPMS...........................................6-14

If you have a flat tire..........................................6-16

Jack and tools ..................................................................6-16

Changing tires ..................................................................6-17

Jack label...........................................................................6-22

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack......................6-23

Towing ...................................................................6-24

Towing service .................................................................6-24

Removable towing hook ................................................6-25

Emergency towing ..........................................................6-26

Emergency commodity ........................................6-28

Fire extinguisher .............................................................6-28

First aid kit........................................................................6-28

Triangle reflector ............................................................6-28

Tire pressure gauge .......................................................6-28

6


H AZ D W AR

■

Type A

■

Type B

G F LA HE

OHCR066001

To turn the hazard warning flasher on or off, press the hazard warning flasher button with the ignition switch in any position. The button is located in the center fascia panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

N C AS E O F A N E ER EN Y

W HIIL E D VIIN G

If the engine stalls while driving

• Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.

• Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, if safe to do so, move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe location.

OHCR066002

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

6-2

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

• Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead.

Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press the hazard warning flasher button, move the shift lever into P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle), apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

• Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.

• When changing a flat tire, follow the instructions provided later in this chapter.

F T HE NG E W NO T

S TA T

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly

• Be sure the shift lever is in N

(Neutral) or P (Park) if it is an automatic transmission vehicle. The engine starts only when the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park).

• Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.

• Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could cause damage to your vehicle.

See instructions for

"Jump Starting" provided in this chapter.

CAUTION

Push or pull starting the vehicle may cause the catalytic converter to overload which can lead to damage to the emission control system.

6

6-3


If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start

• Check the fuel level and add fuel if necessary.

If the engine still does not start, we recommend that you call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

JJU MP AR TIIN

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Follow the jump starting procedure in this section to avoid serious injury or damage to your vehicle. If in doubt about how to properly jump start your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have a service technician or towing service do it for you.

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

(Continued)

6-4

(Continued)

• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

• NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle’s battery cables are connected to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these components with the engine running or when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.

• Do not allow the (+) and (-) jumper cables to touch. It may cause sparks.

• The battery may rupture or explode when you jump start with a low or frozen battery.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle by push-starting.

i

Pb

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough that the jumper cables will reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in the engine compartment at all times, even when the vehicles are turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such as radios, lights, air conditioning, etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle), and set the parking brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.

6

6-5


1VQA4001

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one jumper cable to the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

5. Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) battery/ chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

7. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery or jumper terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

8. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run at approximately 2,000 rpm for a few minutes. Then start your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start after a few attempts, it probably requires servicing. In this event please seek qualified assistance. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the exact reverse order you connected them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

6-6

F T HE NG E O RH EA S

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine may be overheating. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle) and set the parking brake.

If the air conditioning is ON, turn it

OFF.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

WARNING

While the engine is running, keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving parts such as the cooling fan and drive belt to prevent serious injury.

4. Check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop.)

5. If engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and we recommend that you call an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

WARNING

NEVER remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot.

Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

Turn the engine off and wait until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

6

6-7


6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, we recommend that you call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

NOTICE

• Serious loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling system and we recommend the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities.

6-8

TIIR E P ES UR E M NIIT OR SY ST TP MS

Description

OHCI067021

F E QU PE

The TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving.

And it checks whether any tire is significantly under-inflated.

You should reset the system by pushing the TPMS SET button according the accurate procedure and store the current tire pressure.

After that, if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated, the low tire pressure indicator illuminates and a message is shown on the cluster.(if equipped)

Also, if there is a malfunction with the

TPMS, the TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate.

OHCR066024

Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/TPMS

Malfunction Indicator

(2) Low Tire Pressure Telltale

(Shown on the LCD display)

(3) TPMS SET button

TPMS reset procedure

You should reset TPMS in below situations.

• After repairing or replacing tires (or wheels)

• After rotating tires

• After adjusting tire pressure

• When the low tire pressure indicator illuminates

• After replacing suspension or ABS system

6

6-9


The reset process completes automatically. Then check that the low tire pressure indicator turns off after blinking for four seconds.

In case of supervision cluster, check that "Tire pressures stored" message is shown on the cluster.

OHCI067022

1. Park the vehicle on a level, firm surface.

2. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver’s side center pillar outer panel.

3. Starting the engine, press and hold the TPMS SET button for about three seconds to reset

TPMS. (if equipped)

❈ If the low tire pressure indicator turns on repeat step 3.

When resetting TPMS, the current tire pressure is stored as a standard tire pressure.

CAUTION

• Without inflating tires, if you reset TPMS, there may be wrong alarm or TPMS may not indicate the low pressure warning while the tires are significantly under-inflated.

You must check the proper tire pressure before resetting

TPMS.

• The TPMS may not function properly if you do not reset

TPMS although the TPMS needs the TPMS reset.

• If you push the TPMS reset button while driving, the TPMS reset process is not activated.

You must push the TPMS reset button while the vehicle is at a complete stop.

• Tire pressure should be checked and inflated while the tires are cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1.6

km (1 mile) in that 3 hour period.

6-10

Tire pressure monitoring system

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

WARNING

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

6

6-11


NOTICE

If any of the below happens, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1. The Low Tire Pressure Telltale/

TPMS Malfunction Indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is placed to the ON position or engine is running.

2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.

3. The Low Tire Pressure Position

Telltale remains illuminated.

Low tire pressure telltale

Low tire pressure position and tire pressure telltale

OHCR066030

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illuminated and warning message displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The Low Tire

Pressure Position Telltale will indicate which tire is significantly underinflated.

If either telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel. Then, reset

TPMS according TPMS reset procedure.

If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire.

The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will remain on and the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may blink for one minute and then remain illuminated until you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

6-12

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

Low Tire Pressure Telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

Then, reset TPMS according

TPMS reset procedure.

The TPMS may not calibrate properly in below conditions.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- You do not reset TPMS properly.

- You do not use original tires.

- You drive on snowy or slippery roads.

- You rapidly accelerate, decelerate or turn the steering wheel.

- Driving too slow or too fast.

- There is heavier and uneven load on the tires.

- Spare tire or snow chains are used.

WARNING

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

6

6-13


TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.

Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure telltales will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire. Then, reset TPMS according TPMS reset procedure.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the

TPMS, the Low Tire Pressure

Position Telltale will not be displayed even though the vehicle has an under-inflated tire.

CAUTION

Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire.

You may not be able to identify a tire with low pressure by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3 hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

WARNING

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

6-14

WARNING

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions.

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

6-15

6


F Y OU AV A F LA

WARNING

TIIR E

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Follow the instructions in this section when changing a tire to reduce the risk of serious injury or death.

Jack and tools

CAUTION

Be careful as you use the jack handle to stay clear of the flat end. The flat end has sharp edges that could cause cuts.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

(4) Towing hook

(5)Spanner

(6)Driver

OHCR066010

OHCR066027

Turn the winged hold down bolt counterclockwise to remove the spare tire.

Store the spare tire in the same compartment by turning the winged hold down bolt clockwise.

To prevent the spare tire and tools from "rattling", store them in their proper location.

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment under the luggage box cover.

The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only.

6-16

OHCR066028

If it is hard to loosen the tire holddown wing bolt by hand, you can loosen it easily using the jack handle.

1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of the tire hold-down wing bolt.

2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise with the jack handle.

Changing tires

WARNING

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a jack causing serious injury or death to you or those nearby.

Take the following safety precautions:

• Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.

• NEVER attempt to change a tire in the lane of traffic.

ALWAYS move the vehicle completely off the road on level, firm ground away from traffic before trying to change a tire. If you cannot find a level, firm place off the road, call a towing service for assistance.

• Be sure to use the jack provided with the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• ALWAYS place the jack on the designated jacking positions on the vehicle and NEVER on the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.

• Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

• Keep children away from the road and the vehicle.

6

6-17


Follow these steps to change your vehicle's tire:

1. Park on a level, firm surface.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle), apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

3. Press the hazard warning flasher button.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.

B ll ll o c k

OHCR066013

5. Block both the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite of the tire you are changing.

OHCR066014

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each in the order shown above, but do not remove any lug nuts until the tire has been raised off of the ground.

6-18

■ Front ■ Rear

OHCR066015

7. Place the jack at the designated jacking position under the frame closest to the tire you are changing. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two notches and two dimples.

Never jack any other position or part of the vehicle. It may damage to the side seal molding.

OHCR066016

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Make sure the vehicle is stable on the jack.

9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel lug nut wrench and remove them with your fingers. Remove the wheel from the studs and lay it flat on the ground out of the way.

Remove any dirt or debris from the studs, mounting surfaces, and wheel.

10. Install the spare tire onto the studs of the hub.

11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fingers onto the studs with the smaller end of the lug nuts closest to the wheel.

12. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

6

6-19


OHCR066023

13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. Double-check each lug nut until they are tight. After changing tires, we recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the lug nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

The wheel lug nut should be tightened to 11~13 kgf.m

(79~94 lbf.ft).

If you have a tire gauge, check the tire pressure (see "Tires and

Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure instructions.). If the pressure is lower or higher than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and adjust it to the recommended pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible. After changing tires, secure the flat tire and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

NOTICE

Check the tire pressure as soon as possible after installing a spare tire. Adjust it to the recommended pressure.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads on the studs and lug nuts. Make certain during tire changing that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled. If you have to replace your lug nuts make sure they have metric threads to avoid damaging the studs and ensure the wheel is properly secured to the hub. We recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

If any of the equipment such as the jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equipment is damaged or in poor condition, do not attempt to change the tire and call for assistance.

6-20

Use of compact spare tires

(if equipped)

Compact spare tires are designed for emergency use only. Drive carefully on the compact spare tire and always follow the safety precautions.

WARNING

To prevent compact spare tire failure and loss of control possibly resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tire only in an emergency.

• NEVER operate your vehicle over 80 km/h (50 mph).

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.

• Do not use the compact spare tire continuously. Repair or replace the original tire as soon as possible to avoid failure of the compact spare tire.

When driving with the compact spare tire mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tire pressure after installing the compact spare tire.

The compact spare tire should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).

• Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire's tread life is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

• Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.

NOTICE

When the original tire and wheel are repaired and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nut torque must be set correctly. The correct lug nut tightening torque is 11~13 kgf.m

(79~94 lbf.ft).

6

6-21


CAUTION

To prevent damaging the compact spare tire and your vehicle:

• Drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards, such as a potholes or debris.

• Avoid driving over obstacles.

The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 25 mm (1 inch).

• Do not use tire chains on the compact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly.

• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel.

Jack label

OHYK065011

The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the engine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with manual transmission or move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic transmission.

9. The jack should be used on firm level ground.

10. Jack manufacture

11. Production date

12. Representative company and address

6-22

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack

OHCR066029

6-23

6


T OW G

Towing service

Dolly

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground

(without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

Dolly

OYC066010

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

OAD065016

OYC066012

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

6-24

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies:

1. Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position.

2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook

CAUTION

Failure to place the shift lever in

N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transmission.

OYC066013

1. Open the trunk, and remove the towing hook from the tool case.

OHCR066018

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

6

6-25


Emergency towing

■ Front

■ Rear

OHCR066019

OHCR066017

If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook at the front (or rear) of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle with a cable or chain. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

Always follow these emergency towing precautions:

• Place the ignition switch in the ACC position so the steering wheel is not locked.

• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

• Release the parking brake.

• Depress the brake pedal with more force than normal since you will have reduced braking performance.

• More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.

• Use a vehicle heavier than your own to tow your vehicle.

• The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.

• Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.

6-26

ODH063025

• Use a towing cable or chain less than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the middle of the cable or chain for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so the towing cable or chain remains tight during towing.

• Before towing, check the automatic transmission for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the automatic transmission fluid is leaking, flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to your vehicle and vehicle components when towing:

• Always pull straight ahead when using the towing hooks.

Do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

• Do not use the towing hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

• Limit the vehicle speed to

15 km/h (10 mph) and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when towing to avoid serious damage to the automatic transmission.

6-27

6


E ME RG EN Y C OM MO DIIT Y ((IIF UIIP PE

Your vehicle is equipped with emergency commodities to help you respond to emergency situation.

First aid kit

Supplies for use in giving first aid such as scissors, bandage and adhesive tape, etc. are provided.

Fire extinguisher

Triangle reflector

If there is small fire and you know how to use the fire extinguisher, follow these steps carefully.

1. Pull out the safety pin at the top of the extinguisher that keeps the handle from being accidentally pressed.

2. Aim the nozzle towards the base of the fire.

3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away from the fire and squeeze the handle to discharge the extinguisher. If you release the handle, the discharge will stop.

4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the base of the fire. After the fire appears to be out, watch carefully since it may re-ignite.

Place the triangle reflector on the road to warn oncoming vehicles during emergencies, such as when the vehicle is parked by the roadside due to problems.

Tire pressure gauge

(if equipped)

Tires normally lose some air in dayto-day use, and you may have to add a air periodically and usually it is not a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal wear. Always check tire pressure when the tires are cold because tire pressure increases with temperature.

To check the tire pressure, take the following steps:

1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is located on the rim of the tire.

2. Press and hold the gauge against the tire valve. Some air will leak as you begin and more will leak if you don't press the gauge in firmly.

3. A firm non-leaking push will activate the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to see whether the tire pressure is low or high.

5. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure. Refer to "Tires and Wheels" in chapter 8.

6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.

6-28

Maintenance

Engine compartment .............................................7-3

Maintenance services ...........................................7-5

Owner's responsibility......................................................7-5

Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-5

Owner maintenance...............................................7-6

Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-7

Scheduled maintenance services.........................7-9

Normal maintenance schedule (Gasoline Engine)...7-10

Maintenance under severe usage conditions

(Gasoline Engine) ............................................................7-14

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Diesel Engine) .....7-16

Maintenance Under Severe Usage and

Low Mileage Conditions (Diesel Engine) ..................7-19

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.7-21

Engine oil ..............................................................7-24

Checking the engine oil level (Gasoline Engine) .....7-24

Checking the engine oil level (Diesel Engine)..........7-25

Checking the engine oil and filter ..............................7-26

Engine coolant......................................................7-27

Checking the engine coolant level..............................7-27

Changing the coolant .....................................................7-30

Brake/clutch fluid................................................7-31

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level........................7-31

Washer fluid .........................................................7-32

Checking the washer fluid level ..................................7-32

Parking brake .......................................................7-32

Checking the parking brake .........................................7-32

Fuel Filter (For Diesel)........................................7-33

Draining water from fuel filter....................................7-33

Fuel filter cartridge replacement................................7-33

Air cleaner ............................................................7-33

Filter replacement...........................................................7-33

Climate control air filter .....................................7-34

Filter inspection...............................................................7-34

Filter replacement...........................................................7-35

Wiper blades .........................................................7-35

Blade inspection ..............................................................7-35

Blade replacement .......................................................7-36

Battery...................................................................7-38

For best battery service................................................7-38

Battery capacity label ...................................................7-39

Battery recharging .......................................................7-40

Reset items .......................................................................7-40

7

Tires and wheels ..................................................7-41

Tire care .........................................................................7-41

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.............7-41

Checking tire inflation pressure ..................................7-42

Tire rotation ....................................................................7-43

Wheel alignment and tire balance ...........................7-44

Tire replacement .............................................................7-44

Wheel replacement ........................................................7-45

Tire traction......................................................................7-46

Tire maintenance ...........................................................7-46

Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-46

Fuses......................................................................7-50

Fuse/Relay panel description ......................................7-54

Light bulbs.............................................................7-73

Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and fog lamp light bulb replacement .................................7-74

Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-76

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement ................7-77

High mounted stop lamp replacement ....................7-80

License plate light bulb replacement ........................7-81

Interior light bulb replacement ....................................7-81

Appearance care ..................................................7-83

Exterior care ....................................................................7-83

Interior care......................................................................7-88

Emission control system .....................................7-89

Crankcase emission control system ...........................7-89

Evaporative emission control system.........................7-89

Exhaust emission control system ...............................7-90

E NG E C MP TM EN

Kappa 1.4 MPI

Gamma 1.6 MPI


1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Radiator cap

3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine oil filler cap

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

8. Fuse box

9. Battery

7

OYC076001/OYC076002

7-3

Maintenance

UII 1.6 TCI

7-4

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Radiator cap

3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine oil filler cap

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

8. Fuse box

9. Battery

OHCI077060R

M AIIN EN NC E S ER VIIC S

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets

HYUNDAI’s high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Owner’s responsibility

Maintenance service and record retention are the owner’s responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Service Passport.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

Owner maintenance precautions

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury. This chapter provides instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. Several procedures can be done only by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your vehicle and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Service Passport provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7

7-5

Maintenance

O WN R M AIIN TE NC E

WARNING

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS follow these precautions for performing maintenance work:

• Park your vehicle on level ground, move the shift lever into the P (Park, for automatic transmission vehicle) position, apply the parking brake, place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

• Block the tires (front and back) to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Remove loose clothing or jewelry that can become entangled in moving parts.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If you must run the engine during maintenance, do so out doors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.

• Keep flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery and fuel-related parts.

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

WARNING

Diesel Engine

Never manipulate or modify the injection system while running the diesel engine or within 30 seconds after turning OFF the diesel engine. The high-pressure pump, high-pressure pipes, rail, and injectors are still subject to high pressure immediately after stopping the diesel engine.

When the fuel leakage vents out, it may cause serious body injury.

Any people, who are implanted with the artificial cardiac pacemaker, should remain away from the ECU or the wiring harness by at least 30 cm, while running the diesel engine. The high currents of the electronic engine control system produce a considerable amount of magnetic fields.

7-6

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid level.

• Check for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns and other injuries.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice if there is any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or

“hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occurs, check the transmission fluid level.

• Check the automatic transmission

P (Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare for tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

7

7-7

Maintenance

At least twice a year:

(i.e., every Spring and Fall)

• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

• Check headlamp alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.

• Check the seat belts for wear and function.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and hood hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weather strips.

• Lubricate door checker

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic transmission linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

7-8

S CH DU LE D M AIIN TE AN SE RV CE S

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply.

If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km(10 miles) in freezing temperature

• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads

• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

• Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine

• Driving in heavy traffic area

• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly

• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack

• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing

• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

• Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After the periods or distance shown in the chart, continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

7

7-9

Maintenance

Normal maintenance schedule (Gasoline Engine)

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Engine oil and engine oil filter *

Drive belts * 2

Fuel additives *

Air cleaner filter

3

1

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Km×1,000

Except Central & South

America, Middle East* 4

For Central & South


1.4 MPI

1.6 MPI

Except Central & South


For Central & South


Except Middle East* 4

For Middle East* 4

12

10

15

R

I

R

24

20

30

R

Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months

Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months

Add every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months

I

I

I

R

36

30

45

R

R

R

48

40

60

R

I

I

I

R

60

50

75

R

I

R

72

60

90

R

I

I

R

R

84

70

105

R

I

R

96

80

120

R

I

I

I

R

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

R : Replace or change.

* 1 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.

* 2 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped). Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.

* 3 : If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

7-10

Normal maintenance schedule (Gasoline Engine) (Cont.)

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Spark plugs* 4

Valve clearance * 5

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

1.6 MPI

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

Vacuum hose and crankcase ventilation hoses

Fuel filter * 6


12

10

15

I

24

20

30

I

I

36

30

45

I

48

40

60

60

50

75

Replace every 60,000 km

I

72

60

90

I

I

I

84

70

105

I

I

I

I

R

Fuel lines, hoses and connections

Fuel tank air filter

Canister

Cooling system

I I R I I R I

I I R I I R I

Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day.

At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months

I

I

R

I

I

I

96

80

120



* 4 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

* 5 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

* 6 : The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

7

Maintenance


MAINTENANCE

ITEM

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000


12

10

15

24

20

30

36

30

45

48

40

60

60

50

75

72

60

90

84

70

105

Engine coolant * 7

Battery condition

All electrical systems

Brake lines, hoses and connections

Brake pedal

Parking brake

Brake/Clutch fluid

Disc brakes and pads

Except Middle East* 4

For Middle East* 4

96

80

120

At first replace at 210,000 km (130,000 miles) or 10 years: after that, replace every 30,000 km (18,000 miles) or 24 months * 8

I I I I I I I

Inspect every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I



* 7 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.


7-12


MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots

Drive shaft and boots

Tire (pressure & tread wear)

Front suspension ball joints

Exhaust system

Air conditioner refrigerant

Air conditioner compressor


Manual transmission fluid * 9

Automatic transmission fluid

Valve clearance (1.6 MPI) * 10


I

I

I

12

10

15

I

I

I

R

24

20

30

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

36

30

45

I

I

I

I

I

48

40

60

I

60

50

75

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

R

I

I

I

R

No check, No service required

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

72

60

90

I

I

I

I

84

70

105

I

I

I

R



* 9 : Manual transmission fluid should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

* 10 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

I

I

I

I

96

80

120

I

I

I

R

I

7

7-13

Maintenance

Maintenance under severe usage conditions (Gasoline Engine)

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace

Maintenance operation

Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Engine oil and filter

Maintenance item

Except Central &

South America, Middle East* 1

For Central &

South America, Middle East* 1

R

7,500 km (4,500 miles) or 6 months

A, B, C, D, E,

F, G, H, I, J, K

Air cleaner filter

Spark plugs

Manual transmission fluid

R

R

R


Replace more frequently depending on the condition


Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)

C, E

B, H

C, D, E, F, G,

H, I, J

Except Europe R Every 100,000 km (62,000 miles)


For Europe R Every 90,000km(56,000 miles)

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I

Inspect more frequently depending on the condition

* 1 : Middle East includes Libya, Algeria, Morocco, Egypt, Tunisia, Sudan, Iran, etc.

A, C, F, G, H, I, J

C, D, E, F, G

7-14



Maintenance intervals Driving condition


Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors

Parking brake

Driveshaft and boots


I

I

I

I

R






C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

C, E

Severe driving conditions

A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles

(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature

B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads

D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E : Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine

F : Driving in heavy traffic area

G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads

H : Towing a trailer (if equipped)

I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing

J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

K : Frequent ly driving in stop-and-go conditions

7

7-15

Maintenance

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Diesel Engine)

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Months

Miles x 1,000

Km x 1,000

Drive belts * 1

Engine oil and engine oil filter * 2 * 3

Air cleaner filter

Except Middle East

For Middle East

Fuel lines, hoses and connections

Fuel filter cartridge * 4

Cooling system

12

10

24

20

36

30

48

40

60

50

72

60

84

70

96

80

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

At first, inspect at 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48 months, after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months

I

R

Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months

I

R

R

R

I

R

I

R

R

R

I

R

I

R

I

I I

R

I

I

I

R

Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day.

At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months



*

*

1

2

: Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary correct or replace.

: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.

* 3 : The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil can dam-

* 4 age the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">.

If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. HYUNDAI recommends "every

7,500km inspection, every 15,000km replacement". If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule. We recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

7-16

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Diesel Engine) (Cont.)

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles x 1,000

12

10

24

20

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Km x 1,000 15 30

Engine coolant * 6

36

30

45

48

40

60

60

50

75

72

60

90

84

70

105

96

80

120

At first, replace at 210,000 km (130,000 miles) or 120 months : after that, replace every 30,000 km (18,000 miles) or 24 months * 5

Battery condition

Brake lines, hoses and connections

Parking brake (if equipped)

Brake/clutch fluid

Disc brakes and pads


Driveshaft and boots

Tire (pressure & tread wear)

Except Middle East

For Middle East

I

I

I

I

I

I

I I I I I I I

Inspect every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months

I

I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I




* 6 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage. For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

7

7-17

Maintenance

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Diesel Engine) (Cont.)

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles x 1,000

MAINTENANCE

ITEM


Air conditioner refrigerant

Km x 1,000

Air conditioner compressor


Manual transmission fluid * 7

Exhaust system

12

10

15

I

R

I

I

24

20

30

I

R

I

I

I

36

30

45

I

R

I

I

48

40

60

I

R

I

I

I

I



* 7 : Manual transmission fluid should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

60

50

75

I

R

I

I

72

60

90

I

R

I

I

I

84

70

105

I

R

I

I

96

80

120

I

R

I

I

I

I

7-18

Maintenance Under Severe Usage and Low Mileage Conditions (Diesel Engine)

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace


Engine oil and engine oil filter

Air cleaner filter


R

R

Maintenance intervals

Driving condition

A, B, C, D, E, F, G,

H, I, J, K

C, E



Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors

Parking brake (if equipped)

Driveshaft and boots I

I

I

I

I








C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

7

7-19

Maintenance





R

R

Maintenance intervals


Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)

Driving condition

C, E, G

C, D, E, F, G,

H, I, J

Severe driving conditions

A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature

B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt spread roads

D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E : Driving in heavy dust condition

F : Driving in heavy traffic area

G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly

H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack

I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing

J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

7-20

E XP LA NA TIIO N O F S CH DU ED AIIN EN NC E IIT EM

Engine oil and filter Fuel filter (cartridge)

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary.

Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting.

If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections.

We recommend that the fuel filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

When you are inspecting the belt, place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. We recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

Air cleaner filter

We recommend that the air cleaner filter be replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

WARNING

Do not disconnect and inspect spark plugs when the engine is hot. You may burn yourself.

7

7-21

Maintenance

Valve clearance

(for Gasoline Engine)

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Cooling system

Check the cooling system parts, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Engine coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transmission fluid

(if equipped)

Automatic transmission fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions.

We recommend that the automatic transmission fluid changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule.

i

Information

Automatic transmission fluid color is basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transmission fluid will begin to look darker.

It is normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.

NOTICE

The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transmission malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transmission fluid.

(Refer to

“Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)

Manual transmission fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transmission fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

7-22

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/Clutch fluid

(if equipped)

Check the brake/clutch fluid level in the brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The level should be between “MIN” and

“MAX” marks on the side of the reservoir.

Use only hydraulic brake/clutch fluid conforming to DOT

3 or DOT 4 specification.

Brake pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

For more information on checking the pads or lining wear limit, refer to the HYUNDAI web site.

( http://service.hyundai-motor.com

)

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant/ compressor

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever (or pedal) and cables.

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

7

7-23

Maintenance

E GIIN

Checking the engine oil level

(Gasoline Engine)

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s precautions.

2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level ground in P (Park) with the parking brake set. If possible, block the wheels.

3. Turn the engine on and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

4. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

OPDE076067

6. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F (Full) and L (Low).

■

Kappa 1.4 MPI

■

Gamma 1.6 MPI

OYC076005

OYC076006

7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use only the specified engine oil.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

7-24

WARNING

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your engine:

• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Add oil in small quantities and recheck level to ensure engine is not overfilled.

• Do not spill engine oil when adding or changing engine oil.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components. Wipe off spilled oil immediately.

Checking the engine oil level

(Diesel Engine)

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s precautions.

2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level ground in P (Park) with the parking brake set. If possible, block the wheels.

3. Turn the engine on and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

4. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

OPDE076067

6. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F (Full) and L (Low).

7

7-25

Maintenance

■

UII 1.6 TCI

Checking the engine oil and filter

OHCI077006R

7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use only the specified engine oil.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

We recommend that the engine oil and filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

7-26

E NG CO LA T

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant concentration level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the engine coolant level

■ Kappa 1.4 MPI

NOTICE

• When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities.

• Do not drive with no engine coolant. It may cause water pump failure and engine seizure, etc.

■

Gamma 1.6 MPI

■

UII 1.6 TCI

OYC077007

OYC077008

WARNING

Removing radiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot.

Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.

• Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system.

(Continued)

7

OHCI077007R

7-27

Maintenance

WARNING

■ Kappa 1.4 MPI

(Continued)

When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

The electric motor (cooling fan) is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. It may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blades. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

The electric motor (cooling fan) may operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable.

■

Gamma 1.6 MPI

■

UII 1.6 TCI

OYC077009

OYC076010

OHCI077009R

7-28

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) water. Bring the level to F (MAX), but do not overfill.

If frequent additions are required, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an phosphate based ethylene-glycol coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Ambient

Temperature

-15°C (5°F)

-25°C (-13°F)

-35°C (-31°F)

-45°C (-49°F)

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze

35

40

50

60

Water

65

60

50

40 i

Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix is the easiest to mix together as it will be the same quantity of each. It is suitable to use for most temperature ranges of

-35°C (-31°F) and higher.

7

7-29

Maintenance

Changing the coolant

We recommend that the coolant be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

Put a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as generator.

WARNING

• Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

• Engine coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

7-30

B RA E/ LU TC H F

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level

F E QU PE

If the fluid level is excessively low, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING

In the event the brake/clutch system requires frequent additions of fluid, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OYC076011

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the

MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings.

i

Information

Before removing the brake/clutch filler cap, read the warning on the cap.

i

Information

Clean filler cap before removing.

Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/clutch fluid from a sealed container.

WARNING

When changing and adding brake/clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake/ clutch fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.

Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid. A few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake/clutch system can damage brake/clutch system parts.

7

7-31

Maintenance

W AS R F LU

Checking the washer fluid level

OYC076049

The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary.

Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

NOTICE

- Coolant

Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

7-32

WARNING

• Engine coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

• Windshield Washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink and avoid contacting windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

P AR KIIN BR AK

Checking the parking brake

HCR076010

Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of

“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 5~6 “clicks’’ at a force of

20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).

F UE FIIL TE R ((F OR DIIE SE

Draining water from fuel filter

The fuel filter in the diesel engine operates the critical function of separating water from the fuels and preventing accumulating of water in the base.

When enough water is accumulated inside the fuel filter, the warning light

( ) illuminates with the ignition switch in the ON position.

In this case, we recommend you to have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel filter cartridge replacement

We recommend the fuel filter cartridge be replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer according to the

Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.

R C LE NE

Filter replacement

NOTICE

When the accumulated water is not drained at the proper timing, water may permeate in the fuel filter, damaging the major vehicle components, such as the fuel system.

OYC076013

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned for inspection using compressed air.

Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it, as water will damage the filter.

If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be replaced.

7

7-33

Maintenance

C LIIM TE ON RO

T R

Filter inspection

If the vehicle is operated in the severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you, the owner, replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

OYC076014

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.

OYC076015

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching clips.

NOTICE

• Do not drive with the air cleaner filter removed. This will result in excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts, use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

i

Information

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals (refer to “Maintenance

Under Severe Usage Conditions” in this chapter).

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol( ↓↓ ) facing downwards.

Otherwise, the climate control effects may decrease, possibly with a noise.

7-34

Filter replacement

WIIP ER LA S

Blade inspection

OYC076017

OYC076016

1.With the glove box open, lower the glove box by pushing both sides.

OHG075041

2.Remove the climate control air filter case while pressing the lock on the both side of the cover.

3.Replace the climate control air filter.

4.Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

OLMB073019 i

Information

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

7

7-35

Maintenance

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.

Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

NOTICE

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

OLMB073021

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

7-36

OLMB073020

■

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

OLMB073022

2. Press the clip and slide the blade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

OLMB073099

OLMB073098

■

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

OLMB073100

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).

Then pull down the blade assembly (2) and remove it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

4. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper blade.

7

7-37

Maintenance

B AT RY

For best battery service

HCR076019

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

i

Information

The battery, which is originally installed in your vehicle, is maintenance free. However, your vehicle is equipped with a battery marked with

LOWER and UPPER on the side, you should check the electrolyte level.

The electrolyte level should be between the LOWER and the

UPPER. When the electrolyte level is low, add distilled (or de-mineralized) water. (Never add sulfuric acids or other electrolyte).

Be careful not to spill distilled (or demineralized) water over the battery surface or other adjacent components.

Also, do not overfill the battery cells.

If not, it may corrode the battery or other components. Finally, securely close the cell cap. However, we recommend you to contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for better battery service.

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

(Continued)

7-38

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle’s battery cables are connected to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these components with the engine running or when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.

• Do not allow the (+) and (-)

• jumper cables to touch. It may cause sparks.

The battery may rupture or explode when you jump start with a low or frozen battery.

NOTICE

If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.

Battery capacity label

■ Example

OLMB073072

❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. AGM60L-DIN : The HYUNDAI model name of battery

2. 12V : The nominal voltage

3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity

(in Ampere hours)

4. 100RC : The nominal reserve capacity (in min.)

5. 640CCA : The cold-test current in amperes by SAE

6. 512A : The cold-test current in amperes by EN

7

7-39

Maintenance

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

WARNING

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions:

• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.

• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

(Continued)

7-40

(Continued)

• The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.

• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.

• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window

(See chapter 3)

• Trip computer (See chapter 3)

• Climate control system

(See chapter 3)

TIIR ES D W EE S

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than

1.6 km (1 mile).

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter 8.

OHCR086004

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the vehicle.

WARNING

Tire underinflation

Severe underinflation (70 kPa

(10 psi) or more) can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control leading to severe injury or death. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

7-41

7

Maintenance

CAUTION

• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

WARNING

Tire inflation

Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control and potential injury.

CAUTION

Tire pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than 1.6 km (1 mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

7-42

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

WARNING

• Inspect your tires frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire.

HYUNDAI recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

■ without a spare tire

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.

ODH073802

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

i

Information

The outside and inside of the unsymmetrical tire is distinguishable. When installing an unsymmetrical tire, be sure to install the side marked "outside" face the outside. If the side marked "inside" is installed on the outside, it will have a bad effect on vehicle performance.

7-43

7

Maintenance

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handling characteristics that could result in death, severe injury, or property damage.

NOTICE

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Tire replacement

Tread wear indicator

WARNING

When replacing the tires, recheck and tighten the wheel nuts after driving about 1,000 km (620 miles). If the steering wheel shakes or the vehicle vibrates while driving, the tire is out of balance. Align the tire balance. If the problem is not solved, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

OLMB073027

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

WARNING

• Driving on worn-out tires is very hazardous and will reduce braking effectiveness, steering accuracy, and traction.

(Continued)

7-44

(Continued)

• Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity.

• The use of any other tire size or type may seriously affect ride, handling, ground clearance, stopping distance, body to tire clearance, snow tire clearance, and speedometer reliability.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible, or necessary, then replace the two front or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling.

• The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. Tire size can affect wheel speed.

When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System) and ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) (if equipped) to work irregularly.

• For replacement with an unsymmetrical tire, you should check the outside / inside of the unsymmetrical tire. Make sure that the outside mark should locate in the outward direction.

If not, it may adversely affect the vehicle performance, riding comfort, and tire worn-out rates.

Compact spare tire replacement

(if equipped)

A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

7

7-45

Maintenance

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibration, headlamp aim and bumper height.

When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

Tire sidewall labeling

2

1

5,6

7

3

4

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

7-46

1

OLMB073028

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

205/65R16 95H

205 - Tire width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

95 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.5JX16

6.5 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed

Rating

Symbol

S

T

H

V

W

Y

Maximum Speed

180 km/h (112 mph)

190 km/h (118 mph)

210 km/h (130 mph)

240 km/h (149 mph)

270 km/h (168 mph)

300 km/h (186 mph)

3. Checking tire life

(TIN : Tire Identification

Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, tire strength and performance, decline with age naturally (even unused spare tires). Therefore, the tires (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT

Code. The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the

DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2016.

7-47

7

Maintenance

WARNING

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining tread, it is recommended that tires generally be replaced after six (6) years of normal service.

Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this

Warning can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or death.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

7-48

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicles may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by the law.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING

Tire temperature

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure. This can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injury or death.

7

7-49

Maintenance

F US S

■ Blade type

Normal

■

Cartridge type

Normal

■ Multi fuse

Normal

■

Battery fuse terminal

Normal Blown

Blown

Blown

Blown

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver’s side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver’s side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, turn the engine and all switches off, and then disconnect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Fuse replacement

• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.

NOTICE

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

OLF074075 i

Information

Four kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

7-50

NOTICE

• When replacing a blown fuse or relay with a new one, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips. The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause the vehicle wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible fire. If fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts are blown, we recommend that you consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not input any other objects except fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.

Power connector Engine compartment panel fuse replacement

OHCR076048

If your vehicle is to be parked for more than a month you need to do as follows previously in order to prevent battery discharge.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlamps and tail lamps.

3. Open the inner fuse panel cover and pull out the power connector.

HCR076022

1. Turn the engine off and all other switches off.

2. Turn all the switches off.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the tap and pulling up.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, we recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-51

7

Maintenance

NOTICE

After checking the fuse box in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse box cover. If not, electrical failures may occur from water leaking in.

Main fuse (multi fuse) Blade type fuse

HCR076023

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

i

Information

If the multi fuse is blown, we recommend that you consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

HCR076024

Before inspecting a fuse, you should turn OFF the engine as well as the other electric system switches. If a fuse is blown out, remove the blownout fuse and install a new fuse of the same capacity by using the fuse puller, which is prepared inside the fuse box in the engine compartment.

A new fuse may be prepared along with the fuse puller. However, if not, you may temporarily select/use a fuse of the other systems, which do not affect the vehicle operation, such as the audio system.

7-52

Cartridge type fuse Inner panel fuse replacement

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, we recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

HCR076025

Before inspecting a fuse, you should turn OFF the engine as well as the other electric system switches. If a fuse is blown out, remove the blownout fuse and install a new fuse of the same capacity. Pay extreme caution not to damage the blown-out fuse while removing it.

HCR076020

1. Turn the engine and all other switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

i

Information

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced with the same rating.

7

7-53

Maintenance

Fuse/Relay panel description

Driver’s side fuse panel

HCR076020

Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

i

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

7-54

OHCI077027

Fuse Name

DR LOCK

P/OUTLET2

Safety WDW

STOP LAMP

TURN LAMP

P/OUTLET1

HTD MIRROR

FOLD MIRROR

P/WDW RH

SEAT VENT

DRL

START

Symbol

2

POWER

OUTLET

SAFETY

STOP

LAMP

1

POWER

OUTLET

RH

Fuse Rating

20A

Circuit Protected

I/P Junction Block (Tail Gate Unlock Relay, Door Lock/Unlock Relay)

20A

25A

15A

15A

Rear Power Outlet

Driver Safety Power Window Module

I/P Junction Block (Stop Signal Electronic Module)

BCM, SLM Unit

20A

10A

10A

25A

Front Power Outlet

Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module

Power Outside Mirror Switch

Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch

20A

10A

7.5A

Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

I/P Junction Block (DRL Relay)

A/T : Transaxle Range Switch / M/T : Ignition Lock & Clutch Switch, ECM/PCM,

Smart Key Control Module, E/R Junction Block (RLY.1)

7

7-55

Maintenance

Fuse Name

TAIL RH

MODULE2

ENG T

P/WDW LH

SPARE

RR FOG

SPARE

TAIL LH

MODULE3

ABS

BRAKE SWITCH

SPARE

Symbol

RH

T

2

MODULE

LH

SPARE

RR

SPARE

LH

3

MODULE

BRAKE

SWITCH

SPARE

Fuse Rating

7.5A


Head Lamp RH, Rear Combination Lamp (OUT) RH, License Lamp RH,

Rear Combination Lamp (IN) RH, ILL (+)

10A BCM, Crash Pad Switch

15A

25A

E/R Junction Block (Fuse - F21), Vehicle Speed Sensor, Back-Up Lamp Switch,

Stop Lamp Switch, A/T Shift Lever, Transaxle Range Switch, TCM

Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch

25A Spare

10A

15A

7.5A

7.5A

I/P Junction Block (Rear Fog Lamp Relay)

Spare

Head Lamp LH, License Lamp LH, Rear Combination Lamp (OUT) LH,

Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH

Audio, Electro Chromic Mirror, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, A/C Control Module,

A/T Shift Lever Indicator, Head Lamp LH, Head Lamp RH,

Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

E/R Junction Block (Multipurpose Check Connector), ABS/ESP Control Module 7.5A

10A

15A

Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch

Spare

7-56

Fuse Name

FRT FOG

A/CON1

MODULE5

ENG S

ENG E

S/ROOF

IMMO.

MODULE6

SPARE

MODULE4

SPARE

A/BAG

Symbol

FRT

S

1

A/C

5

MODULE

E

6

MODULE

S PARE

4

MODULE

S PARE

Fuse Rating

15A


I/P Junction Block (Front Fog Lamp Relay)

7.5A

10A

E/R Junction Block (RLY.10), DSL Junction Block(LHD) (RLY.2, RLY.3)

A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer

Sunroof Motor, BCM, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

10A

10A

Fuel Filter Warning Sensor, E/R Junction Block (RLY.11B)

ECM/PCM, Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module, Mass Air Flow Sensor

15A

10A

10A

10A

Sunroof Motor

Immobilizer Module

Key Solenoid

Spare

7.5A

10A

10A

SLM Unit, BCM, Smart Key Control Module

Spare

SRS Control Module

7

7-57

Maintenance

Fuse Name

MODULE1

SMART KEY

A/CON2

SPARE

FRT WIPER

ACC

C/LIGHTER

A/BAG IND

CLUSTER

MDPS

AUDIO

ROOM LP

Symbol

1

MODULE

S MART

KEY

2

A/C

S PARE

IND

ACC

CLU S TER

1

AUDIO

Fuse Rating

7.5A

BCM, SLM Unit, SBR Unit

25A

7.5A

15A

25A

Smart Key Control Module

A/C Control Module

10A

20A

7.5A

7.5A


Spare

Multifunction Switch, Front Wiper Motor, E/R Junction Block (RLY.6)

I/P Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay), BCM, SLM Unit, Audio,

A/V & Navigation Head Unit, USB Charging Connector,

Power Outside Mirror Switch, Smart Key Control Module

Cigarette Lighter

Instrument Cluster

Instrument Cluster

7.5A

20A

10A

MDPS Unit

Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit

I/P Junction Block (Room Lamp Relay), A/C Control Module, BCM, Map Lamp,

Data Link Connector, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Overhead Console Lamp,

Center Room Lamp, SLM Unit, Instrument Cluster, Trunk Room Lamp, Rain Sensor

7-58

Engine compartment fuse panel

■ Kappa 1.4 MPI

HCR076022

Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

i

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

OHCI077070

7

7-59

Maintenance

■

Kappa 1.4 MPI

Type

MICRO

MINI

RLY.1

RLY.2

RLY.3

RLY.4

RLY.5

RLY6

RLY.7

RLY.8

RLY.9

RLY.10

RLY.11A

RLY.12

RLY.13

Relay NO.

E90

E91A

E92

E93

E81

E82

E83

E84

E85

E86

E87

E88

E89

7-60

Symbol

1

HI

LO

2

FUEL

PUMP

A/C

MAIN

Relay Name

Start Relay

Head Lamp High Relay

Horn Relay

Cooling Fan1 Relay

Wiper HI Relay

Wiper LO Relay

Head Lamp Low Relay

Burglar Alarm Horn Relay

Cooling Fan2 Relay

A/C Blower Relay

Fuel Pump Relay

A/C Clutch Type ECV Relay

Main Relay

Fuse Name

MDPS1

ALT

RR DEFOG

ABS1

ABS2

BLOWER

WIPER

ENG S2

ENG S1

ENG E3

H/LP RH

H/LP LH

1

2

E 3

RH

LH

Symbol

1

ALT

S 2

S 1

Fuse Rating

80A MDPS Unit

125A

40A


E/R Junction Block (Fuse - F3, F4, F5, F6)

I/P Junction Block (Rear Defogger Relay)

40A

40A

ABS/ESP Control Module

ABS/ESP Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

40A

10A

10A

10A

15A

10A

10A

E/R Junction Block (RLY.10)

Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, E/R Junction Block (RLY.6)

Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)

E/R Junction Block (RLY.4, RLY.9, RLY.11A),

Sub Junction Block (RLY.12), Oil Control Valve #1/#2,

Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Purge Control Solenoid Valve

ECM/PCM

Head Lamp RH

Head Lamp LH

7-61

7

Maintenance

Fuse Name

IGN COIL

INJECTOR

B/UP LP

BATT1

BATT2

IG2

C/FAN

ENG E1

A/CON

ENG T

LO/H LP

HI/H LP

Symbol

IGN

COIL

INJECTOR

1

B/UP

LAMP

2

E1

T

IG2

A/C

Fuse Rating

20A Ignition Coil #1~#4, Condenser

15A

10A

40A

50A

ECM/PCM, Injector #1~#4

Back-Up Lamp Switch


I/P Junction Block (Fuse - F4, F8, F11, F18, F25, F32, F47, F48)

I/P Junction Block (Fuse - F3, F10, F23, F30, F31, F38, Power Window Relay)

40A

40A

30A

10A

Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG2 Relay), E/R Junction Block (RLY.1)

E/R Junction Block (RLY.4, RLY.9)


Sub Junction Block (RLY.12)

20A

20A

20A

PCM (A/T)



7-62

Fuse Name

F/PUMP

HORN

ENG E3

AMS

BATT3

IG1

P/OUTLET

Symbol

FUEL

PUMP

E 3

3

AMS

IG1

POWER

OUTLET

Fuse Rating

20A E/R Junction Block (RLY.11A)

15A

15A

10A

40A


ECM/PCM

Not Used


I/P Junction Block (Fuse - F1, F5, Tail Lamp Relay)

40A

40A

Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG1 Relay, ACC Relay)

I/P Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)

7-63

7

Maintenance

■ Gamma 1.6 MPI

7-64

OHCI077071

■

Gamma 1.6 MPI

Type

MICRO

MINI

RLY.1

RLY.2

RLY.3

RLY.4

RLY.5

RLY6

RLY.7

RLY.8

RLY.9

RLY.10

RLY.11A

RLY.12

RLY.13

Relay NO.

E90

E91A

E92

E93

E81

E82

E83

E84

E85

E86

E87

E88

E89

Symbol

1

HI

LO

2

FUEL

PUMP

A/C

MAIN

Relay Name

Start Relay


Horn Relay

Cooling Fan1 Relay

Wiper HI Relay

Wiper LO Relay

Head Lamp Low Relay


Cooling Fan2 Relay

A/C Blower Relay

Fuel Pump Relay


Main Relay

7-65

7

Maintenance

Fuse Name

MDPS1

ALT

RR DEFOG

ABS1

ABS2

BLOWER

WIPER

ENG S2

ENG S1

ENG E3

H/LP RH

H/LP LH

1

2

E 3

RH

LH

Symbol

1

ALT

S 2

S 1

Fuse Rating

80A MDPS Unit

150A

40A

40A

40A






40A

10A

10A

10A



Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)

E/R Junction Block (RLY.4, RLY.9, RLY.11A),

Sub Junction Block (RLY.12), Oil Control Valve #1/#2,

Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Purge Control Solenoid Valve

ECM/PCM 15A

10A

10A

Head Lamp RH

Head Lamp LH

7-66

Fuse Name

IGN COIL

INJECTOR

B/UP LP

BATT1

BATT2

IG2

C/FAN

ENG E1

A/CON

ENG T

LO/H LP

HI/H LP

T

Symbol

IGN

COIL

INJECTOR

1

B/UP

LAMP

2

E1

IG2

A/C

Fuse Rating

20A Ignition Coil #1~#4, Condenser

15A

10A

40A

50A

ECM/PCM, Injector #1~#4

Back-Up Lamp Switch




40A

40A

30A

10A





20A

20A

20A

PCM (A/T)



7

7-67

Maintenance

Fuse Name

F/PUMP

HORN

ENG E3

AMS

BATT3

IG1

P/OUTLET

Symbol

FUEL

PUMP

E 3

3

AMS

IG1

POWER

OUTLET

Fuse Rating

20A E/R Junction Block (RLY.11A)

15A

15A

10A

40A


ECM/PCM

Not Used



40A

40A



7-68

■

UII 1.6 TCI

Type

MICRO

MINI

RLY.1

RLY.2

RLY.3

RLY.4

RLY.5

RLY6

RLY.7

RLY.8

RLY.9

RLY.10

RLY.11B

RLY.12

RLY.13

Relay NO.

E90

E91B

E92

E93

E81

E82

E83

E84

E85

E86

E87

E88

E89

Symbol

1

HI

LO

2

A/C

MAIN

Relay Name

Start Relay


Horn Relay

Cooling Fan1 Relay

Wiper HI Relay

Wiper LO Relay

Head Lamp Low Relay


Cooling Fan2 Relay

A/C Blower Relay

Fuel Filter Heater Relay


Main Relay

7-69

7

Maintenance

Fuse Name

MDPS1

ALT

RR DEFOG

ABS1

ABS2

BLOWER

WIPER

ENG S1

ENG E4

ENG E2

H/LP RH

H/LP LH

1

2

S 1

E4

E2

RH

LH

Symbol

1

ALT

Fuse Rating

80A MDPS Unit

150A

40A

40A

40A






40A

10A

10A

15A



E/R Junction Block (RLY.4, RLY.9), Sub Junction Block (RLY.12),

Stop Lamp Switch, EGR Actuator, Lambda Sensor

DSL Junction Block(LHD) (RLY.4), DSL Junction Block(RHD) (RLY.4), Fuel Metering Unit

20A

10A

10A

ECM/PCM

Head Lamp RH

Head Lamp LH

7-70

Fuse Name

ENG E3

B/UP LP

BATT1

BATT2

IG2

C/FAN

ENG E1

A/CON

ENG T

LO/H LP

HI/H LP

HORN

Symbol

E 3

1

B/UP

LAMP

2

E1

T

IG2

A/C

Fuse Rating

15A


DSL Junction Block(LHD) (RLY.1), VGT Vacuum Sensor, Camshaft Position Sensor

10A

40A

50A

40A

Back-Up Lamp Switch




50A

30A

10A

20A




TCM (A/T)

20A

20A

15A




7

7-71

Maintenance

Fuse Name

AMS

BATT3

IG1

P/OUTLET

F/FILTER HTR

Symbol

AMS

3

IG1

POWER

OUTLET

Fuse Rating

10A Battery Sensor

40A

40A

40A

30A





E/R Junction Block (RLY.11B)

7-72

LIIG HT LB S

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to replace most vehicle light bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true for removing the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

NOTICE

Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.

CAUTION

If you don’t have necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb.

This is especially true if you have to remove the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

i

Information

After heavy driving, rain or washing, headlamp and tail lamp lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside.

This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesn’t indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

(For Europe)

The low beam light distribution is asymmetric. If you go abroad to a country with opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric part will dazzle oncoming car driver. To prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand several technical solutions (ex. automatic change system, adhesive sheet, down aiming). These headlamps are designed not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you need not change your headlamps in a country with opposite traffic direction.

7

7-73

Maintenance

Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and fog lamp light bulb replacement

Type A

(1) Headlamp (High/Low)

(2) Front turn signal lamp

(3) Position lamp

(4) Front fog lamp*/

Daytime running lamp*

* : if equipped

HCR076030

Headlamp (Halogen bulb)

OLMB073042L

WARNING

• Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.

• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

• A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

7-74

7. Install a new headlamp bulb and snap the headlamp bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.

8. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.

9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

HCR076036

1. Open the hood.


3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.

5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retaining wire by pressing the end and pushing it upward.

6. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly.

i

Information

The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

HCR076038

Turn signal lamp / Position lamp /

Static bending lamp

1. Open the hood.


3.Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4.Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

7

7-75

Maintenance

5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

6.Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly.

7.Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Side repeater lamp replacement

■ Type A

Daytime running lamp(LED)

If the lamp does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

■ Type B

HCR076032

2. Reinstall a new light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

[Type B]

If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OHCR046009

[Type A]

1. Remove the light assembly from the vehicle by prying the lens and pulling the assembly out.

7-76

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement

Type A

Type B (LED type) Outside lamp

(1) Stop/Tail lamp

(2) Rear turn signal lamp

(3) Tail lamp

(4) Rear fog lamp

(5) Back-up lamp

HCR076033

(1) Tail lamp

(2) Stop/Tail lamp

(3) Rear turn signal lamp

(4) Back up lamp

OHCI077034R OYC076037

1.Open the trunk lid.

2.Remove the service cover by pulling out the service cover.

7

7-77

Maintenance

■ Type A

HCR076041

HCR076011

3.Loosen the assembly retaining nuts.

HCR076012

4.Remove the rear combination light assembly from the body of the vehicle.

■

Type B

OHCI077043R

Stop/Tail lamp and turn signal lamp


7-78




Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Stop/Tail lamp (LED Type)

If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Inside lamp

HCR076012

1.Open the trunk.

2.Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk lid cover and then remove the cover.

HCR076011

3.Disconnect the connector and then remove the nuts by turning the nuts counter clockwise.

4. Take the light assembly out.

7

7-79

Maintenance

■ Type A

■

Type B

HCR076040

6.Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

7.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket.

8.Install the light assembly to the trunk.

9.Reinstall the nuts and connector and then the trunk lid cover by pushing in the screw.

High mounted stop lamp replacement

OYC076043

HCR076042

Backup lamp, tail lamp, rear fog lamp


7-80

OYC076044

1.Open the trunk.

2.Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots.




Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

License plate light bulb replacement

HCR076014

1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver gently pry the lens cover from the lamp housing.

2.Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

3.Install a new bulb.

4.Reinstall in the reverse order.

Interior light bulb replacement

■ Map lamp

• Type A

• Type B

HCR076035

7

HCR076017

7-81

Maintenance

■ Room lamp

■

Luggage room lamp

HCR076015

1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.

2.Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

3.Install a new bulb in the socket.

4.Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

NOTICE

Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

HCR076016

7-82

A PP AR NC E C AR

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle’s finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits.

A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

NOTICE

• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

WARNING

Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

7

7-83

Maintenance

OLMB073082

NOTICE

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

NOTICE

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts.

This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

7-84

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

NOTICE

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads.

• Do not wash the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleanser containing acid or alkaline detergents.

7

7-85

Maintenance

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces cars of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the longterm corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your car are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the car.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials.

This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the car.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:

7-86

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your car clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your car at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the car, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion.

This is particularly true if you wash your car in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours.

Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.

Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

7-87

7

Maintenance

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions that follow for the proper way to clean vinyl.

NOTICE

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

NOTICE

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

NOTICE

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

NOTICE

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

7-88

E MIIS SIIO N C NT OL YS TE M

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Service

Passport in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all emission regulations.

There are three emission control systems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

NOTICE

For the Inspection and Maintenance

Test (With Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

7

7-89

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes.

Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions following to avoid CO poisoning.

7-90

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING

• A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.

Do not park, idle, or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as dry grass, paper, leaves, etc.

• The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot while the engine is running or immediately after the engine is turned off. Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned.

Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control.

It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

CAUTION

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engine.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the engine off and descending steep grades in gear with the engine off.

(Continued)

7

7-91

Maintenance

(Continued)

• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If you run out of gasoline, it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)

(if equipped)

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system removes the soot in the exhaust gas.

The DPF system automatically burns

(or oxidizes) the accumulated soot in accordance with driving situations, unlike a disposable air filter.

In other words, the accumulated soot is automatically purged out by the engine control system and by the high exhaust-gas temperature at normal/ high driving speeds.

However, when the vehicle is continually driven at repeated short distances or driven at low speed for a long time, the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperature. In this case, the accumulated soot is out of the detection range, the soot oxidization

( process does not occur, and the

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp

) Illuminates.

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

Lamp stops illuminating, when the driving speed exceeds 60 km/h

(37mph), or when the engine rpm is between 1,500 and 2,500 with the gear in the 2nd position or above for approximately 25 minutes.

When the DPF Lamp continuously blinks or the warning message “Check exhaust system” illuminates in the above cases, we recommend that you have the DPF system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

When the vehicle is continuously driven with the DPF Lamp flashing for an extended period of time, it may damage the DPF system and lower the fuel economy.

7-92

CAUTION

Diesel Fuel

(if equipped with DPF)

We recommend you to use only the regulated diesel fuels, when your vehicle is equipped with the DPF system.

When you use other diesel fuels, which are high in sulfurs (above

50 ppm) or that contain unspecified additives, they may damage the DPF system and cause white smoke emissions.

Lean NOx Trap (if equipped)

The Lean NOx Trap (LNT) system removes the nitrogen oxide from the exhaust gas. A smell can occur in the exhaust gas depending on the quality of the fuel, and it can degrade NOx reduction performance. Please use the regulated automotive diesel fuel.

7-93

7

Specifications & Consumer information

Dimensions ..............................................................8-2

Engine ......................................................................8-2

Bulb wattage...........................................................8-3

Tires and wheels ....................................................8-4

Air conditioning system ........................................8-5

Tire load and speed capacity ...............................8-5

Volume and weight ................................................8-5

Recommended lubricants and capacities ...........8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number ..........................8-7

Vehicle identification number (VIN)..................8-10

Vehicle certification label ...................................8-10

Tire specification and pressure label ...............8-11

Engine number .....................................................8-11

Air conditioner compressor label ......................8-12

Declaration of conformity ..................................8-12


DIIM EN SIIO S

Items

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front tread

Rear tread

Wheelbase

185/65 R15

195/55 R16

185/65 R15

195/55 R16

E NG E

Displacement

Bore x Stroke

Firing order

No. of cylinders

Item

8-2 cc mm

Gamma 1.6 MPI

1,591

77x85.4

1-3-4-2

4, in-line

Kappa 1.4 MPI

1,368

72 x 84

1-3-4-2

4, in-line mm (in)

4440

1,729

1475

1524

1512

1529

1517

2,600

U II 1.6

1,582

77.2 x 84.5

1-3-4-2

4, in-line

B UL B W TT AG

Front

Headlamp

Turn signal lamp

Position lamp

Side repeater lamp

Rear

Rear combination lamp

Interior

High mounted stop lamp

License plate lamp

Overhead console lamp

Map lamp

Luggage lamp

* : if equipped

Light Bulb

High/Low

Outside (Type A)

Inside (Type A)

Outside (Type B)

Inside (Type B)

Tail

Back up

Tail/Stop

Turn signal

Tail

Rear fog*

Back up

Tail/Stop

Turn signal

Bulb type

H4

PY21W

W5W

WY5W

W5W

W16W

P21/5W

PY21W

P215W

P21W

W16W

W5W

PY21W

16W

W5W

10W

8W

5W

16

5

10

8

5

21

5

5

21

Wattage

60/55

21

5

5

5

5

21/5

21

21/5

8

8-3


TIIR ES D W EE S

Item

Full size tire

Fuel type Tire size

Wheel size

Front Rear Front Rear

185/65 R15 5.5J X 15 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33)

Gasoline

Inflation pressure, bar (kPa, psi)

Normal load * 1 Maximum load

195/55 R16 6.0J X 16 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33)

Wheel lug nut torque kgf·m (lbf·ft, N•m)

11~13

(79~94, 107~127)

Diesel

185/65 R15 5.5J X 15 2.4 (240, 35) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.4 (240, 35) 2.4 (240, 35)

195/55 R16 6.0J X 16 2.4 (240, 35) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.4 (240, 35) 2.4 (240, 35)

* 1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons

NOTICE

• It is permissible to add 20 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon. Tires typically lose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every 7°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level

(Air inflation per altitude: +10 kPa/1 km (+2.4 psi/1 mile).

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

8-4

R C ON TIIO NIIN

Items

SY ST M

Compressor lubricant g (oz.)

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.

Weight of Volume

450 ± 25 (15.8 ± 0.88)

120 ± 10 (4.23 ± 0.35)

TIIR E L D A ND SP EE AP AC Y

Item Fuel type Tire size Wheel size

Full size

* 1 LI : LOAD INDEX

Gasoline

Diesel

185/65R15

195/55R16

185/65R15

195/55R16

* 2 SS : SPEED SYMBOL

5.5J X 15

6.0J X 16

5.5J X 15

6.0J X 16

V OL ME ND GH T

Items

Gross vehicle weight

Kappa 1.4 MPI

M/T A/T

1540 1570 kg

Luggage volume (VDA)

M/T : Manual Transmission l

A/T : Automatic Transmission

Load Capacity

LI * 1 kg

88

87

560

545

88

87

560

545

Gamma 1.6 MPI

M/T A/T

1570 1600

480

Classification

R-134a / R-1234yf

PAG 30 / PAG 205A

Speed Capacity

SS * 2 km/h

H

V

210

240

H

V

210

240

M/T

U II 1.6

A/T

1650 1680

8-5

8


R EC MM ND LU BR NT S A CA PA TIIE S

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume

Engine oil * 1 * 2

(drain and refill)

Recommends

Gasoline

Except Middle East * 5

For Middle East * 5

3.6 l (3.8 US qt.)

Classification

API SM & ILSAC GF-4 (or above),

ACEA A5/B5 * 3

ACEA A5/B5 * 3 with DPF * 6 ACEA C2 or C3 * 4

Diesel 5.3 l (5.6 US qt.) without DPF * 6 ACEA C2 or C3 or A3/B4 * 4



Gasoline

Diesel

1.6 ~ 1.7 l

(1.7 ~ 1.8 US qt.)

1.7 ~ 1.8 l

(1.8 ~ 1.9 US qt.)

6.7 l (7.1 US qt.)

HK SYN MTF 70W (SK)

SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W MTF

(H.K.SHELL)

GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)

API GL-4, SAE 70W, TGO-9

MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV,

NOCA ATF SP-IV,

HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV

* 1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 8.

* 2 : Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

* 3 : If the recommended engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API SL/ / ILSAC GF-3 or ACEA A3.

* 4 : If the recommended engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use engine oil above API CH-4.

* 5 : Middle East includes Libya, Algeria, Morocco, Egypt, Tunisia, Sudan, Iran, etc.

* 6 : Diesel Particulate Filter

8-6

Coolant

Brake/clutch fluid

Fuel

Lubricant

Gasoline

Diesel

Volume Classification

5.3 l (5.60 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water

(Ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant for

6.3 l (6.66 US qt.) aluminum radiator)

0.7 ~ 0.8 l

(0.7 ~ 0.8 US qt.)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

45 l (11.9 US gal.) Refer to “Fuel Requirements” in the Introduction chapter.

Recommended SAE viscosity number

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

8

8-7


When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

°C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

(°F) -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

For middle east

20W-50

15W-40

10W-30

0W-30, 5W-30, 5W-40

Kappa

1.4 MPI

Except

Middle

East* 3

20W-50

15W-40

10W-30

0W-20, 5W-20* 1 , 5W-30

Gamma

1.6 MPI

Except

Middle

East* 3

For Middle

East* 3

20W-50

15W-40

10W-30

0W-20, 5W-20* 1 , 5W-30

20W-50

15W-40

10W-30

5W-30* 2 , 5W-40

8-8

Temperature

U2 1.6 TCI

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

°C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

(°F) -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

For all countries

10W-30

5W-30

15W-40

0W-30

* 1

* 2

* 3

: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE

5W-20. However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE

5W-30. However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

: Middle East includes Libya, Algeria, Morocco, Egypt, Tunisia, Sudan, Iran, etc.

8-9

8


V EH E IID EN

■ Frame number

FIIC AT NU MB

■ VIN label (if equipped)

V EH E C ER

L AB L

FIIC AT N

OHCR086001

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor under the passenger seat. To check the number, open the cover.

OAD085003

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

OHCR086002

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).

8-10

TIIR E S EC FIIC AT AN D

P RE SS UR E L AB L

E NG E N MB R

■ Kappa 1.4 MPI The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

OYC086006

■ Gamma 1.6 MPI

OHCR086004

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

■ UII 1.6 TCI

OYC086005

8

OHCI087005R

8-11


R C ON

C OM ES SO

ON R

LA BE

D EC LA RA

C ON OR MIIT Y

N O F

■

Example

OHC081001

A compressor label informs you the type of compressor your vehicle is equipped with such as model, supplier part number, production number, refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).

CE0678

The radio frequency components of the vehicle comply with requirements and other relevant provisions of

Directive 1995/5/EC.

Further information including the manufacturer's declaration of conformity is available on HYUNDAI web site as follows: http://service.hyundai-motor.com

8-12

Index

I I

Index

A

Accessing your vehicle...................................................3-5

Immobilizer system....................................................3-11

Remote key ..................................................................3-5

Remote key precautions...............................................3-6

Smart key .....................................................................3-8

Smart key precautions ...............................................3-10

Air bag - Supplemental restraint system ......................2-37

Additional safety precautions ....................................2-57

Air bag warning and indicator...................................2-45

Air bag warning labels...............................................2-58

How does the air bags system operate?.....................2-45

SRS care.....................................................................2-56

What to expect after an air bag inflates.....................2-49

Where are the air bags? .............................................2-40

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision?.............2-51

Air cleaner ....................................................................7-33

Filter replacement ......................................................7-33

Air conditioner compressor label .................................8-12

Air conditioning system .................................................8-5

Appearance care ...........................................................7-83

Exterior care...............................................................7-83

Interior care................................................................7-88

Audio (With Touch Screen)..........................................4-34

Feature of Your Audio ...............................................4-35

Media .........................................................................4-42

Phone .........................................................................4-53

Radio ..........................................................................4-40

Setup ..........................................................................4-62

Audio (Without Touch Screen).......................................4-8

Feature of Your Audio .................................................4-9

Media .........................................................................4-15

Phone .........................................................................4-23

Radio ..........................................................................4-14

Setup ..........................................................................4-31

Automatic climate control system ..............................3-105

Automatic heating and air conditioning ..................3-106

Manual heating and air conditioning.......................3-107

System maintenance.................................................3-114

System operation......................................................3-112

Automatic transmission ................................................5-21

Automatic transmission operation .............................5-21

Good driving practices...............................................5-25

Parking .......................................................................5-25

I-2

B

Battery...........................................................................7-38

Battery capacity label ................................................7-39

Battery recharging......................................................7-40

For best battery service..............................................7-38

Reset items.................................................................7-40

Before driving.................................................................5-3

Before entering the vehicle..........................................5-3

Before starting .............................................................5-3

Brake/clutch fluid .........................................................7-31

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level........................7-31

Braking system .............................................................5-27

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................................5-30

Disc brakes wear indicator ........................................5-28

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............................5-32

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) ...................................5-36

Good braking practices ..............................................5-36

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ................................5-35

Parking brake .............................................................5-28

Power brakes..............................................................5-27

Rear drum brakes.......................................................5-28

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) ......................5-34

Bulb wattage ...................................................................8-3

C

Child restraint system (CRS)........................................2-27

Children always in the rear........................................2-27

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)................2-29

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-28

Climate control additional features ............................3-118

Cluster ionizer..........................................................3-118

Climate control air filter ...............................................7-34

Filter inspection .........................................................7-34

Filter replacement ......................................................7-35

Cruise control ...............................................................5-38

Cruise Control operation ...........................................5-38

D

Declaration of Conformity ..................................4-64, 8-12

CE for EU ..................................................................4-64

FCC Warning .............................................................4-65

NCC for Taiwan.........................................................4-66

Defroster .......................................................................3-94

Rear window defroster...............................................3-94

Dimensions .....................................................................8-2

I

I-3

Index

Door locks.....................................................................3-12

Auto door lock/unlock features .................................3-16

Child-protector rear door locks .................................3-16

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ...........3-14

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle .........3-12

Driver Assist System ....................................................3-91

Rear parking assist system.........................................3-92

Rear view camera ......................................................3-91

E

Emergency commodity.................................................6-28

Fire extinguisher ........................................................6-28

First aid kit.................................................................6-28

Tire pressure gauge....................................................6-28

Triangle reflector .......................................................6-28

Emission control system...............................................7-89

Crankcase emission control system...........................7-89

Evaporative emission control system ........................7-89

Exhaust emission control system...............................7-90

Engine .............................................................................8-2

Engine compartment ...............................................1-8, 7-3

Engine coolant ..............................................................7-27

Changing the coolant .................................................7-30

Checking the engine coolant level.............................7-27

Engine number..............................................................8-11

Engine oil......................................................................7-24

Checking the engine oil and filter .............................7-26

Checking the engine oil level (Diesel Engine)..........7-25

Checking the engine oil level (Gasoline Engine)......7-24

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..............7-21

Exterior features ...........................................................3-32

Fuel filler door ...........................................................3-38

Hood...........................................................................3-32

Smart trunk ................................................................3-35

Trunk..........................................................................3-33

Exterior overview (I) ......................................................1-2

Exterior overview (II).....................................................1-3

F

Fuel Filter (For Diesel).................................................7-33

Draining water from fuel filter ..................................7-33

Fuel filter cartridge replacement................................7-33

Fuses .............................................................................7-50

Fuse/Relay panel description.....................................7-54

H

Hazard warning flasher...................................................6-2

I-4

I

If the engine overheats ...................................................6-7

If the engine will not start ..............................................6-3

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly....6-3

If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start......6-4

If you have a flat tire ....................................................6-16

Changing tires ............................................................6-17

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack .....................6-23

Jack and tools.............................................................6-16

Jack label ...................................................................6-22

Ignition switch ................................................................5-4

Engine Start/Stop button..............................................5-9

Key ignition switch......................................................5-5

Important safety precautions ..........................................2-2

Air bag hazards ...........................................................2-2

Always wear your seat belt..........................................2-2

Control your speed.......................................................2-2

Driver distraction .........................................................2-2

Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-2

Restrain all children.....................................................2-2

In case of an emergency while driving ..........................6-2

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing..............6-2

If the engine stalls while driving .................................6-2

If you have a flat tire while driving.............................6-3

Instrument cluster .........................................................3-41

Gauges .......................................................................3-42

Instrument cluster control ..........................................3-42

LCD display messages...............................................3-58

Odometer ...................................................................3-45

Transmission shift indicator.......................................3-45

Warning and indicator lights......................................3-46

Instrument panel overview .............................................1-6

Interior features...........................................................3-121

Ashtray.....................................................................3-121

Cigarette lighter .......................................................3-125

Clock ........................................................................3-125

Clothes hanger .........................................................3-126

Cup holder ...............................................................3-121

Floor mat anchor(s) .................................................3-126

Power outlet .............................................................3-123

Sunvisor ...................................................................3-122

USB Charger............................................................3-124

Interior overview ............................................................1-4

J

Jump starting...................................................................6-4

I

I-5

Index

K

Keys ................................................................................3-3

Key operations .............................................................3-3

Record your key number .............................................3-3

L

Lcd display (for type B) ...............................................3-65

LCD display control ..................................................3-65

LCD modes ................................................................3-65

User settings mode.....................................................3-68

Light..............................................................................3-79

Exterior lights ............................................................3-79

Interior lights .............................................................3-85

Light bulbs....................................................................7-73

Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and fog lamp light bulb replacement..............................7-74

High mounted stop lamp replacement.......................7-80

Interior light bulb replacement ..................................7-81

License plate light bulb replacement.........................7-81

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement.................7-77

Side repeater lamp replacement.................................7-76

M

Maintenance services......................................................7-5

Owner maintenance precautions..................................7-5

Owner's responsibility .................................................7-5

Manual climate control system.....................................3-96

Heating and air conditioning .....................................3-97

System maintenance ................................................3-103

System operation .....................................................3-101

Manual transmission.....................................................5-18

Good driving practices...............................................5-20

Manual transmission operation..................................5-18

Mirrors ..........................................................................3-20

Inside rearview mirror ...............................................3-20

Outside rearview mirror.............................................3-21

Multimedia system .........................................................4-2

Antenna ........................................................................4-2

AUX, USB and iPod ® port ..........................................4-2

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology hands-free...............4-4

How vehicle radio works.............................................4-5

Steering wheel audio control .......................................4-3

I-6

O

Owner maintenance ........................................................7-6

Owner maintenance schedule ......................................7-7

P

Parking brake................................................................7-32

Checking the parking brake.......................................7-32

R

Recommended lubricants and capacities........................8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number ........................8-7

S

Scheduled maintenance services ....................................7-9

Maintenance Under Severe Usage and

Low Mileage Conditions (Diesel Engine)...............7-19

Maintenance under severe usage conditions

(Gasoline Engine) ....................................................7-14

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Diesel Engine) .......7-16

Normal maintenance schedule (Gasoline Engine) ....7-10

Seat belts.......................................................................2-15

Additional seat belt safety precautions......................2-23

Care of seat belts .......................................................2-26

Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-18

Seat belt safety precautions .......................................2-15

Seat belt warning light...............................................2-16

Seats................................................................................2-3

Front seats ....................................................................2-6

Headrest .....................................................................2-11

Rear seats .....................................................................2-9

Safety precautions........................................................2-5

Special driving conditions ............................................5-43

Driving at night..........................................................5-44

Driving in flooded areas ............................................5-45

Driving in the rain .....................................................5-44

Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-43

Highway driving ........................................................5-45

Rocking the vehicle ...................................................5-43

Smooth cornering.......................................................5-44

Steering wheel ..............................................................3-18

Electric power steering (EPS) ...................................3-18

Horn ...........................................................................3-19

Tilt steering / Telescope steering ...............................3-19

I

I-7

Index

Storage compartment ..................................................3-119

Center console storage .............................................3-119

Glove box.................................................................3-119

Multi box .................................................................3-120

Sunglass holder ........................................................3-120

Sunroof .........................................................................3-28

Resetting the sunroof .................................................3-30

Sliding the sunroof.....................................................3-28

Sunroof opening and closing .....................................3-28

Sunshade ....................................................................3-30

Tilting the sunroof .....................................................3-29

T

Theft-alarm system .......................................................3-17

Tire load and speed capacity ..........................................8-5

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....................6-9

Changing a tire with TPMS .......................................6-14

Description...................................................................6-9

Low tire pressure position and tire pressure telltale..6-12

Low tire pressure telltale ...........................................6-12

Tire pressure monitoring system................................6-11

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator...............................................6-14

TPMS reset procedure .................................................6-9

Tire specification and pressure label ............................8-11

Tires and wheels....................................................7-41, 8-4

Checking tire inflation pressure.................................7-42

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..............7-41

Tire care .....................................................................7-41

Tire maintenance........................................................7-46

Tire replacement ........................................................7-44

Tire rotation ...............................................................7-43

Tire sidewall labeling.................................................7-46

Tire traction................................................................7-46

Wheel alignment and tire balance .............................7-44

Wheel replacement ....................................................7-45

Towing ..........................................................................6-24

Emergency towing .....................................................6-26

Removable towing hook ............................................6-25

Towing service...........................................................6-24

Trip computer ...............................................................3-71

Type A........................................................................3-71

Type B .......................................................................3-75

I-8

V

Vehicle certification label .............................................8-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)............................8-10

Vehicle weight ..............................................................5-50

Overloading ...............................................................5-50

Volume and weight .........................................................8-5

W

Washer fluid..................................................................7-32

Checking the washer fluid level ................................7-32

Windows .......................................................................3-24

Power windows .........................................................3-24

Windshield defrosting and defogging.........................3-116

Automatic climate control system ...........................3-117

Defogging logic .......................................................3-118

Manual climate control system................................3-116

Winter driving...............................................................5-46

Snow or icy conditions ..............................................5-46

Winter Precautions.....................................................5-48

Wiper blades .................................................................7-35

Blade inspection.........................................................7-35

Blade replacement .....................................................7-36

Wipers and washers ......................................................3-88

Windshield washers ...................................................3-89

Windshield wipers .....................................................3-88

I-9

I